WO2007097346A1 - Cleaning blade and its manufacturing method, mounting method and positioning device for cleaning blade, and cartridge - Google Patents

Cleaning blade and its manufacturing method, mounting method and positioning device for cleaning blade, and cartridge Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007097346A1
WO2007097346A1 PCT/JP2007/053112 JP2007053112W WO2007097346A1 WO 2007097346 A1 WO2007097346 A1 WO 2007097346A1 JP 2007053112 W JP2007053112 W JP 2007053112W WO 2007097346 A1 WO2007097346 A1 WO 2007097346A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
blade
cleaning
cleaning blade
support member
mounting portion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2007/053112
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Atsushi Masuda
Toshinori Sakai
Original Assignee
Graphic Co. Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Graphic Co. Ltd. filed Critical Graphic Co. Ltd.
Publication of WO2007097346A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007097346A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03GELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
    • G03G21/00Arrangements not provided for by groups G03G13/00 - G03G19/00, e.g. cleaning, elimination of residual charge
    • G03G21/0005Arrangements not provided for by groups G03G13/00 - G03G19/00, e.g. cleaning, elimination of residual charge for removing solid developer or debris from the electrographic recording medium
    • G03G21/0011Arrangements not provided for by groups G03G13/00 - G03G19/00, e.g. cleaning, elimination of residual charge for removing solid developer or debris from the electrographic recording medium using a blade; Details of cleaning blades, e.g. blade shape, layer forming
    • G03G21/0029Details relating to the blade support

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a cleaning blade that is provided in contact with an image carrier in an image forming apparatus and cleans the image carrier, a method for manufacturing the same, a mounting method and a positioning device for a cleaning blade, and a cartridge.
  • An image forming apparatus that forms an image by electrophotography is used as a printer or the like.
  • the image forming apparatus forms an electrostatic latent image by charging the surface portion of the photoreceptor with a charging device and then exposing it, and developing the formed electrostatic latent image with a developing device to form a toner image.
  • An image is formed by forming and transferring and fixing to a recording medium such as paper.
  • the toner constituting the toner image the toner remaining on the surface of the photoreceptor without being transferred to the recording medium is removed by the cleaning device.
  • the cleaning device removes the toner by bringing the blade member of the tally blade into contact with the photosensitive member, and cleans the photosensitive member.
  • Parts such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade are worn out by repeated use, and their performance deteriorates. Therefore, it is necessary to replace them with new ones.
  • components such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade are integrally incorporated in the housing, and are detachably provided as a cartridge in the image forming apparatus. By replacing the cartridge, it is possible to easily replace deteriorated parts such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade.
  • a blade member that also has elastic material force such as rubber is used as a cleaning blade.
  • a metal plate to be the blade support member 131 is inserted into the mold, and a material such as rubber to be the blade member 132 is poured into the mold, so that the blade member 132 and the blade support member 131 are connected.
  • the die-integrated cleaning blade 130 is widely used because it has advantages such as the blade member 132 being less likely to peel off than the adhesive-type tallying blade (see, for example, JP-A-2004-133261 (No. (See page 3, Figure 3-4)).
  • the die-integrated type cleaning blade 130 has a higher manufacturing cost than the adhesive-type cleaning blade because a die is necessary for the production of the blade member 132.
  • an adhesive type cleaning blade is used as a replacement cleaning blade.
  • a blade support member 141 is bent to form a stepped portion 143, and a cleaning blade 140 having a blade member 142 attached to the stepped portion 143 is used!
  • the position of the blade member 142 is adjusted according to the level of the stepped portion 143. Therefore, an error occurs in the level of the stepped portion 143. Then, the blade member 142 cannot be disposed at an appropriate position, and an error occurs in the mounting position. Further, since the blade member 142 is disposed on the same side as the photoconductor 134 with respect to the blade support member 141, the thickness of the blade member 142 and the thickness of the adhesive layer that bonds the blade member 142 and the blade support member 141 together. If an error occurs, the mounting position of the blade member 142 will deviate properly.
  • the cleaning blade 140 is attached to the blade attachment portion 133 of the cartridge in a state where the surface portion of the blade support member 141 opposite to the side supporting the blade member 142 is in contact, the parallelism of the blade support member 141 is low. As a result, the mounting position of the blade member 142 is also displaced by an appropriate position force. Even if an error occurs in the thickness of the blade support member 141, the attachment position of the blade member 142 is displaced.
  • the material of the cleaning blade and the blade member 142 are different from those installed in the cartridge before replacement, even if the blade member 142 can be placed at the same position as the blade member mounted before replacement, When the blade member 142 is brought into contact, the manner in which the blade member 142 falls may change. When the cleaning blade is replaced, the photoconductor 134 is also replaced with a new one. Therefore, the positional relationship between the photoconductor 134 and the blade member 142 that was mounted before the replacement is changed. It is not always the best position relationship.
  • the attachment position of the blade member 142 is particularly problematic when a small particle size toner having a volume average particle size of about 10 m or less is used for the purpose of high image quality.
  • the small particle size toner has a smaller frictional force from the blade member 142 and the photoreceptor 134 than the large particle size toner having a volume average particle size exceeding 10 m. Therefore, when a small particle size toner is used, if the blade member 142 is poorly mounted and the blade member 142 is not placed at an appropriate position, the toner will pass through the edge of the blade member 142 and the thickness of the blade member 142 will be reduced.
  • a so-called toner slipping phenomenon occurs that adheres to the surface portion on the side close to the photoreceptor 134 of the surface portion on one side in the direction.
  • it is required to further increase the mounting accuracy of the blade member.
  • the mounting position of the blade member 142 depends on the difference in the size of the step portion 143 and the thickness of the blade member 142. Appropriate positioning force will shift and mounting accuracy will soon be low. Therefore, sufficient cleaning performance cannot be exhibited. In particular, when a small particle size toner is used, the toner slip-through phenomenon cannot be prevented and the image quality is deteriorated. Disclosure of the invention
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a cleaning blade capable of attaching a blade member with high accuracy, a method for manufacturing the same, a mounting method and a positioning device for the cleaning blade, and a cartridge equipped with the cleaning blade.
  • the present invention is applied to an image forming apparatus that develops a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transfers the toner image to a recording medium to form an image.
  • a cleaning blade that is attached to a blade mounting portion of a cartridge that can be provided and cleans the image carrier by bringing the blade member into contact with the image carrier, the blade member;
  • a blade support member that supports the blade member on the surface portion facing the blade mounting portion, and protrudes to the side of the blade support member facing the blade mounting portion, and is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade support member.
  • a defining member that defines at least one of the posture of the blade support member and the interval between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion.
  • the cleaning blade includes the blade member and the defining member on the side of the blade support member facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge.
  • the defining member is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member, thereby defining at least one of the attitude of the blade supporting member and the distance between the blade supporting member and the blade mounting portion.
  • the blade member is provided on the surface portion of the blade support member facing the blade attachment portion, the influence of the parallelism and thickness dimension error of the blade support member on the attachment position of the blade member can be eliminated. Further, by attaching the blade member to the blade mounting portion so that the blade member is opposite to the image carrier with respect to the blade support member, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the error in the thickness dimension of the blade member. Thus, the blade member is formed on the stepped portion formed on the blade support member. Compared to the conventional cleaning blade, the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member is small, so the blade member is accurately placed in a position suitable for cleaning by removing toner from the image carrier. Can be installed. It can also be installed easily. In addition, since the blade member can be attached with high accuracy as described above, the toner slipping phenomenon can be prevented and the image quality can be prevented from being deteriorated particularly when a small particle size toner is used.
  • the defining member is a spacer.
  • the defining member is a spacer, it can be accurately formed into a desired shape. Accordingly, since at least one of the attitude of the blade support member and the interval between the blade support member and the blade attachment portion can be defined with higher accuracy, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be improved.
  • the spacer is formed such that the surface portion on the side attached to the blade attachment portion is separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as it approaches the blade member.
  • the spacer is formed such that the surface portion on the side attached to the blade attachment portion is separated from the blade support member force or closer to the blade support member as it approaches the blade member.
  • the blade support member can be attached to the blade attachment portion while being inclined, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the defining member is a protrusion formed integrally with the blade support member by perforating the plate-like member forming the blade support member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. It is a part.
  • the defining member is a protrusion formed integrally with the blade support member by perforating the plate-like member forming the blade support member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. It is.
  • the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Also, since the defining member can be formed more easily, tally The manufacturing cost of the blade can be reduced.
  • the protruding portion is formed in a cylindrical shape
  • the opening end of the protruding portion is formed so as to be separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as the blade member is approached.
  • the opening end portion of the cylindrical projecting portion which is the defining member is formed so as to be separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as the blade member is approached.
  • the blade support member can be attached to be inclined with respect to the blade attachment portion, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined more accurately. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with higher accuracy.
  • the present invention is further characterized by further comprising posture adjusting means for adjusting the posture of the blade support member.
  • the posture adjusting means since the posture adjusting means is further provided, the posture of the blade support member can be more reliably adjusted to a predetermined posture by the posture adjusting means when attached to the blade mounting portion. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the edge force on the side of the blade member attached to the blade support member in the direction parallel to the reference surface to which the cleaning blade of the blade attachment portion should be attached is brought into contact with the image carrier. It further comprises parallel position defining means for defining the position of the blade support member in the direction facing the end on the side.
  • the blade is in contact with the image carrier from the end of the blade member on the side attached to the blade support member in the direction parallel to the reference surface.
  • the position of the blade support member in the direction facing the end on the other side can be defined by the parallel position defining means. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the present invention is also detachable from an image forming apparatus for developing a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transferring the toner image to a recording medium to form an image.
  • the cleaning blade is attached to the blade mounting portion of the cartridge provided in the cartridge and cleans the image carrier by bringing the blade member into contact with the image carrier.
  • the blade member is attached to the surface portion of the blade support member that is predetermined to face the blade mounting portion, and protrudes from the surface portion of the blade support member to which the blade member is attached.
  • a cleaning blade is manufactured by providing a spacer. Accordingly, the blade support member is provided with the blade member and the spacer on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge, and the spacer is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member to support the blade.
  • a cleaning blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained. In such a cleaning blade, since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the spacer, the blade member is placed in a position suitable for cleaning by removing toner from the image carrier. It can be installed with high accuracy.
  • the present invention is also detachable from an image forming apparatus for developing a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transferring the toner image to a recording medium to form an image.
  • a cleaning blade manufacturing method for cleaning an image carrier by attaching the blade member to the image carrier to be attached to a blade attachment portion of a cartridge provided in
  • a blade support member having a protrusion is formed by punching a plate-like member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion.
  • a cleaning blade is manufactured by sticking the blade member to the surface portion of the side of the support member on which the protruding portion is formed.
  • the blade support member has a blade member on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge and has a protruding portion, and the protruding portion is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member.
  • a cleaning blade that can define at least one of the attitude of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained.
  • the blade member since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the protruding portion, the blade member is placed at a position suitable for cleaning by removing the image carrier force toner. Can be installed with high accuracy.
  • the present invention also provides a cleaning blade mounting method for mounting the cleaning blade of the present invention on a blade mounting portion of a cartridge.
  • the angle formed between the surface of the blade member that is attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier on which the blade member abuts is a predetermined angle, and the reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted
  • the angle formed between the surface of the blade member that is attached to the blade support member and the surface that contacts the blade member of the image carrier is a predetermined angle
  • the blade The blade support member posture and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion are regulated so that the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the mounting portion is a predetermined position. It is done.
  • the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. Therefore, the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention
  • the defining step includes
  • the reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted while the angle formed by the surface of the blade member on the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle from the plurality of spacers. And a step of selecting a spacer so that the position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined position is a predetermined position.
  • the blade support member of the blade member is changed from a plurality of spacers having different angles and thicknesses between the surface attached to the blade attachment portion and the surface on the blade support member side.
  • the spacer is formed so that the angle between the surface to be pasted and the surface of the image carrier becomes a predetermined angle, and the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion is a predetermined position. Select.
  • the posture of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be easily defined. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention
  • the defining step includes
  • the angle between the surface of the plurality of cleaning blades to be attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle, and a reference on which the blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted. Select the cleaning blade so that the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the surface is a predetermined position.
  • the blade member in the defining step, includes a plurality of cleaning blades having different heights of the projecting portions of the blade support member and different angles between the end surfaces of the projecting portions and the virtual plane including the surface portion supporting the blade member.
  • the angle between the surface to be attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle
  • the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion is a predetermined position. So that the cleaning blade is selected.
  • the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the image carrier strength toner and cleaning it.
  • the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention
  • the blade member in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion and in the direction facing the end of the blade member that is in contact with the image bearing member.
  • the method further includes the step of defining the position of the blade support member in the direction by the parallel position defining means so that the position of the position becomes a predetermined position.
  • the cleaning blade is in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion, and the end portion of the blade member that is in contact with the image carrier from the end portion that is attached to the blade support member.
  • the position of the blade support member is further defined by the parallel position defining means so that the position of the blade member in the direction to face is a predetermined position.
  • the present invention is a cleaning blade positioning device for determining a mounting position of the cleaning blade of the present invention to a blade mounting portion of a cartridge
  • Holding means for holding the blade mounting portion and the cleaning blade
  • Second position detecting means for detecting a position of the cleaning blade held by the holding means in a second direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction and a second reference position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade in the second direction.
  • a cleaning blade positioning device comprising: an interval adjusting means for adjusting.
  • the blade mounting portion and the cleaning blade are held by the holding means, the position of the blade member of the cleaning blade in the first direction and the first reference position are detected by the first position detecting means, and the second position detection is performed.
  • the position of the blade member of the tally blade in the second direction and the second reference position are detected.
  • the position in the first direction and the first reference position of the blade member detected by the first position detection means, and the position in the second direction and the second reference position of the blade member detected by the second position detection means are output. Output by means.
  • the operator can recognize the distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position. .
  • the distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position are adjusted by moving the cleaning blade by the distance adjusting means. Is done. Accordingly, for example, the operator moves the cleaning blade by the interval adjusting unit based on the output result of the output unit, thereby the interval between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the blade. The distance between the position of the member in the second direction and the second reference position can be adjusted. Therefore, position the cleaning blade so that the blade member is positioned at a position suitable for removing the toner and cleaning the image carrier force. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with high accuracy.
  • the present invention also provides a cartridge detachably provided in the image forming apparatus, the image carrier,
  • the cartridge includes an image carrier, a housing that houses the image carrier, and the cleaning blade of the present invention that is attached to a blade attachment portion of the housing.
  • the regulating member is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member, thereby defining at least one of the posture of the blade supporting member and the distance from the blade mounting portion. To do.
  • the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced compared to the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade supporting member.
  • a cartridge can be obtained in which the blade member is accurately mounted at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • FIG. 1 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a cleaning blade 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 3A is a front view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3B is a rear view of the tarting blade 1 shown in FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. .
  • FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a positioning device 40 according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a side view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41 provided in the positioning device 40.
  • FIG. 8 is a front view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41.
  • FIG. 9 is a plan view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41. As shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 10 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the original device 45 provided in the positioning device 40 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged side view showing an enlarged portion of the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 of the prototype 45 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing how the position of the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a method for attaching the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 110 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a side view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 17A is a front view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15,
  • FIG. 17B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15, and
  • FIG. 17C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 116 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the protruding portion 118 that is inclined with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 120 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing an observation part of the blade member 2 in evaluation 2.
  • FIG. 22A and 22B are diagrams schematically showing the state of the blade member 2 of Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 after the printing test.
  • FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are perspective views showing a contact portion of the blade member 2 of Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 with the photosensitive drum.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing a simplified configuration of a mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 140 according to the prior art.
  • FIG. 1 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a cleaning blade 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 3A is a front view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 1 is a virtual plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the virtual plane including the cutting plane line I I of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 3A.
  • FIG. 2 corresponds to a right side view of the cleaning blade 1.
  • FIG. 1 FIG. 1 and FIGS. 3A to 3C, a part of the thickness is omitted for easy understanding.
  • the cleaning blade 1 of the present embodiment is particularly suitable when a small particle size toner having a volume average particle size of about 10 m or less is used.
  • the cleaning blade 1 generally includes a blade member 2, a blade holder 3 that is a blade support member that supports the blade member 2, and a spacer 4 that is a defining member.
  • the blade member 2 has a belt-like flat plate shape, and has a rectangular cross-sectional shape in a virtual plane perpendicular to the thickness direction.
  • the blade member 2 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is parallel to the axial direction of a cylindrical photosensitive drum 11 that is an image carrier.
  • the blade member 2 is formed of an elastic material such as urethane rubber such as thermosetting polyurethane or silicone rubber, for example. Blade member 2 For example, it is affixed to the blade holder 3 with an adhesive.
  • adhesives examples include hot melt adhesives such as polyurethane (abbreviated PUR) adhesives, ethylene acetate butyl copolymer (abbreviated EVA) adhesives, and polyamide (abbreviated PA) adhesives.
  • PUR adhesive is preferable.
  • the blade member 2 is provided on the opposite side of the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3, and is upstream of the rotational direction of the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3. Placed in.
  • the blade member 2 is provided on the same side as the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3 and is arranged downstream of the blade holder 3 in the rotation direction of the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the blade holder 3 is easily peeled off. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the adhesive force between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3.
  • the PUR adhesive as the adhesive, it is possible to suppress the peeling of the blade member 2 from the blade holder 3 and to improve the durability of the taring blade 1.
  • the surface portion of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached is preferably subjected to a primer treatment.
  • the primer treatment of the blade holder 3 is performed, for example, by applying a primer to the surface portion of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached.
  • Examples of the primer application method include dating for immersing the blade holder 3 in a tank in which the primer is stored and applying the primer.
  • the primer is not limited to datebing, and may be applied to the blade holder 3 by, for example, a brush or a spray.
  • the primer include a phenol-based primer and a silane coupling agent-based primer.
  • the blade holder 3 has a flat plate shape.
  • the blade holder 3 is provided so as to extend in the longitudinal direction of the blade member 2, and supports the blade member 2 on a surface portion on one side in the thickness direction.
  • a holder side screw hole 3a through which a mounting screw 30 (to be described later) for screwing to the blade mounting portion 29 of the cartridge 10 is inserted is formed in a portion near both ends in the longitudinal direction of the blade holder 3. .
  • the blade holder 3 holds the blade member 2 in the short direction.
  • the end opposite to the supporting side is bent to form a bent portion 7.
  • the bent portion 7 is formed so as to correspond to the shape of the housing 15 of the cartridge 10. In the present embodiment, the bent portion 7 is formed to be bent at approximately 90 °, and the blade holder 3 is L-shaped.
  • the blade holder 3 is realized by a plate having a rigid material force such as a surface-treated steel plate, a stainless steel plate, an iron plate, or a copper plate.
  • both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the blade holder 3 are notched, and notched portions 8 are formed.
  • the notch portion 8a includes a first notch portion 8a to be engaged with an engaging portion 9 of a spacer 4 to be described later, and an end opposite to the side on which the blade member 2 is pasted in the short direction of the blade holder 3. And a second notch portion 8b formed in the portion.
  • the first notch 8a and the second notch 8b are formed to extend in the short direction of the blade holder 3 so as to correspond to the shape of the positioning projection provided on the housing 15 of the cartridge 10.
  • first notch 8a and the second notch 8b are each a notch width force, which is a width dimension in the short direction of the blade holder 3, and the width of the positioning projection provided on the housing 15. It is formed larger than the dimension.
  • the first notch portion 8a and the second notch portion 8b prevent the blade holder 3 from moving in the longitudinal direction and allow movement in the short direction.
  • the positioning projection provided on the housing 15 is passed through the first notch 8a and the second notch 8b.
  • the blade holder 3 is moved in the short direction, and the blade holder 3 is adjusted and fixed in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29, which is the short direction, so that the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is fixed.
  • the position of the blade edge 2a of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the blade member 2 the amount of the blade member 2 entering the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted.
  • the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted more easily.
  • the first notch 8a and the second notch 8 are in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade attachment 29 and from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 3.
  • the spacer 4 is provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3. More specifically, the spacers 4 are provided at both longitudinal ends of the blade holder 3.
  • the spacer 4 has a flat plate shape. In the present embodiment, the spacer 4 is formed to have a uniform thickness, and the surface on the side attached to the blade attachment portion 29 and the surface on the side supported by the blade holder 3 are parallel. The thickness dimension of the spacer 4 is, for example, 2 mm.
  • the spacer 4 is formed with a spacer-side screw hole 4a through which a screw for screwing to the blade mounting portion 29 is inserted so as to communicate with the holder-side screw hole 3a.
  • the spacer 4 is notched so as to correspond to the notch 8 of the blade holder 3.
  • the spacer 4 has a pair of engaging portions 9 protruding to the side supported by the blade holder 3 so as to be engaged with the first notch portion 8a of the blade holder 3.
  • the engaging portion 9 has a long portion 9a at the free end portion, a width dimension in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction is shorter than the long portion 9a, and a step portion 9b at the base end portion.
  • the length dimension of the step 9b is slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the blade holder 3. For example, when the thickness dimension of the blade holder 3 is about 1.2 mm, the length dimension of the stepped portion 9b is about 1.25 mm.
  • the pair of stepped portions 9b are formed such that the distance between the surfaces in contact with the first notch 8a of the blade holder 3 is substantially equal to the notch width of the first notch 8a in the short direction of the blade holder 3. Is done.
  • the pair of long portions 9a is formed such that the distance between the surfaces connected to the surface of the step portion 9b that contacts the first notch portion 8a is larger than the notch width of the first notch portion 8a. .
  • the engaging portion 9 is inserted into the first notch portion 8 a of the blade holder 3, and the long portion 9 a protrudes to the other side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3 and engages with the blade holder 3. Fixed to.
  • the spacer 4 is formed of a material having a degree of elasticity that is not deformed when screwed to the blade mounting portion 29 with a mounting screw 30 described later.
  • the material for forming the spacer 4 include acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (abbreviated as ABS) and polystyrene resin, as well as surface-treated steel sheets, aluminum sheets, and stainless steel sheets.
  • ABS acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
  • polystyrene resin as well as surface-treated steel sheets, aluminum sheets, and stainless steel sheets.
  • a metal plate etc. are mentioned.
  • the spacer 4 can be formed by injection molding or the like.
  • the spacer 4 is formed by punching, for example. It can be done.
  • the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is pasted is pasted.
  • the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is pasted is pasted.
  • FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the cartridge 10 includes a photosensitive drum 11 that is an image carrier, a taring device 12 that includes the cleaning blade 1 described above, a charging device 13 that is a charging unit that charges the photosensitive drum 11, and a photosensitive member.
  • the developing device 14 is a developing unit that develops an electrostatic latent image formed on the drum 11, and includes a photosensitive drum 11, a cleaning device 12, a charging device 13, and a housing 15 that houses the developing device 14.
  • the cleaning device 12, the charging device 13, and the developing device 14 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side in the rotation direction of the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the cartridge 10 is repeatedly used for image formation, and then the deteriorated parts such as the photosensitive drum and the cleaning blade are removed to clean the housing 15, and the cleaned housing 15 is replaced with a new photosensitive drum.
  • 11 and cleaning blade 1 etc. are installed cartridges. More specifically, the cartridge 10 of this embodiment is a cartridge replaced with the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment in which the mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130 shown in FIG. 24 is used.
  • the photosensitive drum 11 has a cylindrical shape.
  • the photosensitive drum 11 is formed, for example, by providing a photosensitive layer formed by binding a photoconductive material with a binder on the outer peripheral surface portion of a cylindrical conductive support.
  • the photosensitive drum 11 is supported by the housing 15 so as to be rotatable about the axis 1 la via the shaft member l ib and is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction indicated by the arrow 16.
  • the cartridge 10 further includes a drum shirt 17 that covers and protects the photosensitive drum 11 when the cartridge 10 is not attached to the image forming apparatus.
  • the drum shirt 17 exposes the photosensitive drum 11 as shown in FIG. 4 when the cartridge 10 is mounted on the image forming apparatus, and the photosensitive drum 11 when the cartridge 10 is not mounted on the image forming apparatus. 1 Angular displacement drive is performed to cover 1.
  • the charging device 13 is a charging roller 13 in the present embodiment, and charges the photosensitive drum 11 while being in contact with the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the charging roller 13 has a cylindrical shape, is rotatably supported around an axis, and is driven to rotate in the counterclockwise direction indicated by an arrow 18.
  • the developing device 14 develops the electrostatic latent image with a one-component developer made of toner.
  • the developing device 14 includes a toner hopper 19 that is a container for storing toner, an agitator 20 that is a stirring means for stirring the toner stored in the toner hopper 19, and a toner that is a one-component developer in the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the developing roller 21 has a cylindrical shape, is rotatably supported around the axis, and is driven to rotate in a counterclockwise direction indicated by an arrow 23.
  • the developing roller 21 is disposed so as to contact the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the developing device 14 includes a regulating blade 24 that is provided so as to contact the developing roller 21 and regulates the amount of toner transported to the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the regulating blade 24 is supported by the housing 15 via the support plate 25.
  • a seal blade 26 is provided at the opening of the housing 15 to prevent toner leakage from the gap with the developing roller 21.
  • the cleaning device 12 includes the cleaning blade 1 described above and a waste toner button 27 that is a storage container for storing toner removed from the photosensitive drum 11 by the cleaning blade 1.
  • a recovery blade 28 for preventing the toner collected in the waste toner box 27 from reattaching to the photosensitive drum 11 is provided at the opening of the housing 15.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is fixed to a blade mounting portion 29 provided in the housing 15 by mounting screws 30 such as screw screws.
  • the blade mounting portion 29 is configured to be detachable from the housing 15.
  • a cushion member 32 is interposed between the bent portion 7 of the blade holder 3 which is one end portion in the short direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the housing 15. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 is allowed to move in a direction parallel to a reference surface, which will be described later, of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • the cushion member 32 is formed of, for example, polyurethane foam.
  • the blade member 2 is provided on the side opposite to the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3.
  • the blade member 2 is supported by the blade holder 3, and is attached to the photosensitive drum 11 at the free end.
  • An edge portion (hereinafter also referred to as a blade edge portion) 2a that is an end portion on the near side is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11 spontaneously.
  • the cleaning device 12 removes the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum 11 after the toner image is transferred to the recording medium by a transfer device (not shown) by bringing the blade member 2 of the cleaning blade 1 into contact with the photosensitive drum 11. Collect in waste toner box 27. As a result, the photosensitive drum 11 is cleaned and can be used repeatedly. The photosensitive drum 11 is repeatedly cleaned by the cleaning blade 1 as it is driven to rotate in the direction of the arrow 16, so that it can be used repeatedly and continuously.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is attached to the housing 15 prior to the attachment of the photosensitive drum 11 to the housing 15.
  • the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 contacts the predetermined position 90 of the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11, and the blade holder of the blade member 2
  • the angle formed between the surface supported by 3 and the tangent 90a at the position 90 where the edge 2a of the photosensitive drum 11 abuts (hereinafter referred to as the abutting angle between the blade member and the photosensitive drum).
  • the position and posture of the blade member 2 are adjusted so that the angle is determined.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is mounted so that the spacer 4 is in contact with the blade mounting portion 29.
  • the spacer 4 force is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3.
  • the blade mounting portion 29 is placed in an appropriate position and posture by screwing the mounting blade 30 with the cleaning blade 130 of the mold integrated molding type shown in FIG. It is formed as follows. If the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, the blade holder 3 is mounted so as to be in contact with the blade mounting portion 29, so that the blade member 2 has the spacer 4 interposed. As compared with the case where the photoconductor drum 11 is used, it is forced away from the photosensitive drum 11. In this state, the blade member 2 cannot come into contact with the photosensitive drum 11 and the toner cannot be removed from the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the tally blade 1 of the blade mounting portion 29 is adjusted by adjusting the thickness of the spacer 4.
  • the reference plane a direction perpendicular to the surface to be mounted
  • the position of the blade member 2 can be adjusted. Accordingly, the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 can be easily arranged at the predetermined set contact position 90, compared to the case where the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. Can do.
  • the posture of the blade member 2 with respect to the photosensitive drum 11 at this time is represented by the contact angle ⁇ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 is relative to the surface of the spacer 4 on the side supported by the blade holder 3 (hereinafter referred to as the holder-side surface) and the surface attached to the blade mounting portion 29 (hereinafter referred to as the mounting-side surface). It can be adjusted by tilt angle ⁇ 2.
  • the inclination angle ⁇ 2 of the holder 4 surface of the spacer 4 with respect to the mounting side surface is selected so that the contact angle ⁇ 1 becomes a preset contact angle that is predetermined as a value suitable for toner removal by the blade member 2.
  • the set contact angle varies depending on the material forming the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11, the material of the blade member 2, and the like.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is mounted by changing the contact angle ⁇ 1
  • the cartridge 10 with the cleaning blade 1 mounted at each contact angle ⁇ 1 is mounted on the image forming apparatus, and sample images are continuously printed on the recording paper. A live-action test is performed.
  • the toner removal performance is evaluated based on the quality of the image formed in this live-action test, the amount of film reduction of the photosensitive drum 11 and the presence or absence of scratches on the outer peripheral surface of the photosensitive drum 11, and for example, Set contact angle ⁇ 1 when there are few image defects such as sweeping unevenness in the image, and there is little film loss on photoconductor drum 11, and there is little scratch on the outer peripheral surface of photoconductor drum 11. Calculate as an angle.
  • the spacer 4 of the present embodiment is formed to have a uniform thickness, and the inclination angle ⁇ 2 of the holder-side surface with respect to the attachment-side surface is approximately 0 °. If the contact angle ⁇ 1 does not reach the set contact angle when the cleaning blade 1 is attached with the spacer 4 having such a uniform thickness, the spacer 4 is replaced with the spacer 4 having a uniform thickness. As shown in Fig. 5, use a spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface. Spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface, more specifically, the mounting side surface is formed so as to move away from blade holder 3 or approach blade holder 3 as blade member 2 is approached. By using the spacer, the contact angle ⁇ 1 can be easily adjusted to the set contact angle. In FIG. 5, the blade holder 3 as the mounting surface approaches the blade member 2. A spacer 31 formed so as to be separated from is shown.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is attached as follows, for example.
  • a plurality of spacers 4 having different thicknesses and inclination angles ⁇ 2 of the holder side surface with respect to the mounting side surface are prepared.
  • the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 becomes a predetermined position, and the contact angle ⁇ 1 becomes the set contact angle.
  • Select spacer 4 the positional force of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 when the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is positioned at the set contact position 90. This corresponds to a predetermined position of the blade member 2 in the straight direction.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 with the selected spacer 4 interposed between the blade attachment portion 29 and the blade holder 3.
  • the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3.
  • the cleaning blade 1 has the first notch portion 8a and the second notch portion 8b which are parallel position defining means, so that the position of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 is determined. Can be adjusted.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is fixed to the blade attachment portion 29 after being adjusted so that the position of the blade member 2 in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade attachment portion 29 is a predetermined position.
  • the position force of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 when the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is positioned at the set contact position 90 is applied to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. This corresponds to a predetermined position of the blade member 2 in the parallel direction.
  • the spacer 4 is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, and the position of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 are out of the range. Since at least one of them is defined, the position and posture of the blade member 2 with respect to the photosensitive drum 11 can be defined.
  • Figure 2 above Since there is no need to form the stepped portion 143 on the blade support member 141 unlike the cleaning blade 140 shown in FIG. 5, the mounting position of the blade member 2 is prevented from deviating from the set contact position 90 due to the dimensional error of the stepped portion 143. be able to.
  • the blade member 2 is provided on the surface portion of the blade holder 3 facing the blade mounting portion 29, even if parallelism and thickness dimension errors occur in the blade holder 3, the mounting position of the blade member 2 is not affected. do not do. Further, since the blade member 2 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 so as to be opposite to the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3, even if an error occurs in the thickness dimension of the blade member 2, the blade member 2 The mounting position of member 2 is not affected.
  • the blade member 2 is attached more than the conventional cleaning blade 140 in which the blade member 142 is attached to the stepped portion 143 formed in the blade support member 141 as shown in FIG.
  • the influence of the error on the position is small. Therefore, the blade member 2 can be accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it.
  • the blade member 2 can be attached with high accuracy, a small particle size toner is used only when a large particle size toner having a volume average particle size exceeding 10 m is used. Even in this case, the toner slip-through phenomenon can be prevented and the image quality can be prevented from deteriorating.
  • the tail wing blade 1 of the present embodiment is preferable because it can prevent the toner slip-through phenomenon and lower the image quality, particularly when a small-diameter toner is used. Further, since the influence of the error is small, the adjustment at the time of mounting becomes easy, so that the cleaning blade 1 of this embodiment can be easily mounted.
  • the position of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted, so that the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is more reliably disposed at the set contact position 90. Therefore, the blade member 2 can be attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it with higher accuracy.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the positioning device 40 according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • the positioning device 40 includes an attachment adjustment unit 41 and an inspection unit 42.
  • the mounting adjustment section 41 is roughly It includes an image unit 43, a second imaging unit 44, an original device 45 that indicates a position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade 1, and a transport unit 46 shown in FIGS.
  • the first imaging unit 43 includes a first camera 47 as first position detection means and a second camera 48 as second position detection means.
  • the second imaging unit 44 includes a third camera 49, which is another first position detection means, and a fourth camera 50, which is another second position detection means.
  • the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 image the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45.
  • the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are configured to be capable of imaging with multiple gradations, for example, 256 gradations.
  • the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are transported by the transport unit 46 to one side of the longitudinal direction of the vertical blade 1 indicated by an arrow 51.
  • the first imaging unit 43 is provided so as to face the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1
  • the second imaging unit 44 is disposed in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1. It is provided so as to face one end C in the direction.
  • the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the first imaging unit 43, and the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the second imaging unit 44.
  • An intermediate portion between both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the second imaging unit 44 while the cleaning blade 1 is transported to one longitudinal direction 51.
  • the inspection unit 42 is based on the processing unit 52 to which image information captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 of the attachment adjustment unit 41 is input, and the image information input to the processing unit 52.
  • a display unit 53 that is an output means for displaying an image, and an inspection table 54 on which the processing unit 52 and the display unit 53 are placed.
  • the processing unit 52 is realized by a central processing unit (abbreviated as CPU).
  • the processing unit 52 controls the operation of the mounting adjustment unit 41 and the display unit 53.
  • the display unit 53 is configured to be able to display an image with multiple gradations, for example, 256 gradations.
  • the display unit 53 is realized by, for example, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
  • the images of the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are displayed on the display unit 53.
  • the display unit 53 divides the display screen into the same number as the cameras provided in the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44, and images captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are displayed on one screen.
  • FIG. 7 is a side view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41 provided in the positioning device 40
  • FIG. 8 is a front view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41
  • FIG. 9 is a plan view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41. It is.
  • the moving direction 51 of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 6 corresponds to one of the longitudinal directions of the shaft 66 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 corresponds to a side view of the mounting adjustment portion 41 as viewed from the other side in the X direction.
  • the attachment adjustment unit 41 includes a first imaging unit 43, a second imaging unit 44, a master 45, a support unit 55, a transport unit 46, a base 56, and a distance adjustment unit 72.
  • the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are paired and configured to be bilaterally symmetric.
  • the first imaging unit 43 includes a first camera 47, a second camera 48, first support means 57 that supports the first camera 47, and second support means 58 that supports the second camera 48.
  • the first camera 47 is supported by the first support means 57 so as to be movable in the direction in which the optical axis of the lens that is the imaging center extends (hereinafter also referred to as the optical axis direction).
  • the first camera 47 can be focused by moving in the optical axis direction of the lens.
  • the first camera 47 is focused by, for example, imaging the cleaning blade 1 by the first camera 47 and displaying the captured image on the display unit 53 shown in FIG. This can be done by moving the first camera 47 in the direction of the optical axis of the lens so that the image displayed in the section 53 becomes clear.
  • the optical axis direction of the lens of the first camera 47 coincides with the heel direction.
  • the second camera 48 is supported by the second support means 58 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction. wear.
  • the second support means 58 is supported by the support portion 55.
  • the support surface of the support portion 55 on which the second support means 58 is supported is formed in a tapered shape. Accordingly, the second support means 58 is supported while being inclined with respect to the Y direction, so that the optical axis of the lens, which is the imaging center of the second camera 48, is inclined with respect to the Z direction.
  • the second imaging unit 44 includes a third camera 49, a fourth camera 50, third support means 59 that supports the third camera 49, and fourth support means 60 that supports the fourth camera 50.
  • the third camera 49 is supported by the third support means 59 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction.
  • the fourth camera 50 is supported by the fourth support means 60 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction.
  • the fourth support means 60 is supported by the support portion 55 in the same manner as the second support means 58.
  • the fourth support means 60 is supported by the tapered support surface of the support portion 55 in the same manner as the second support means 58, so that the optical axis of the lens that is the imaging center of the fourth camera 50 is Z. Inclined with respect to direction.
  • the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are realized by, for example, a CCD camera including a charge coupled device (abbreviated as CCD).
  • the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 take images of the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 provided in the blade member 2 of the cleaning blade 1 and the master 45 held by the holding means 65 provided in the moving table 61, Generate an image signal based on the captured image.
  • the image signals generated by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are given to the processing unit 52 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 52 drives the display unit 53 so that an image is displayed based on the given image signal.
  • the display unit 53 displays images captured by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 based on instructions from the processing unit 52.
  • the processing unit 52 controls the positioning device 40 as follows. In the processing by the processing section 52, the blade mounting section 29 and the cleaning blade 1 temporarily fixed to the blade mounting section 29 are held by the holding means 65 provided on the moving base 61 of the mounting adjustment section 41. For example, the operator Is started by pressing an inspection start button (not shown).
  • the processing unit 52 controls the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 so that the blade member 2 and the original device 45 of the cleaning blade 1 are imaged.
  • the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 take an image of the blade member 2 and the original device 45 based on a command from the processing unit 52, and take an image.
  • An image signal based on the imaged image is generated and output to the processing unit 52.
  • the processing unit 52 controls the display unit 53 to display an image based on the generated image information.
  • the display unit 53 displays images captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 based on instructions from the processing unit 52.
  • the transport unit 46 includes a moving table 61, a moving table driving unit 62, a transmission unit 63, guide means 64, and holding means 65.
  • the movable table 61 is plate-shaped and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the holding means 65 is provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the movable table 61.
  • the holding means 65 has a gripping means (not shown), and holds the blade mounting portion 29 and the master 45 of the cartridge 10 shown in FIG. 4 by gripping with the gripping means.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is held by the holding means 65 via the blade mounting portion 29.
  • the moving table drive unit 62 drives the moving table 61 to move it in the X direction.
  • the movable table drive unit 62 is realized by a stepping motor, for example.
  • the transmission unit 63 transmits the driving force from the moving table driving unit 62 to the moving table 61.
  • the transmission portion 63 extends in the X direction, and is a so-called ball screw including a shaft 66 spirally engraved with a thread groove and a ball nut (not shown) fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66, and the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66. And a pair of bearings 67 that support both ends.
  • One end in the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66 of the transmission part 63 is connected to the moving table driving unit 62, and a ball nut fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66 is connected to the moving table 61.
  • the guide means 64 includes a moving table support portion 68 that supports the moving table 61, a guide rail 69 that includes the moving table support portion 68, and a rail support portion 70 that supports the guide rail 69.
  • the moving table support portion 68 is configured to be able to be fitted to the guide rail 69.
  • the guide rail 69 is a slide guide rail provided extending in the X direction.
  • the rail support portion 70 is provided on the surface portion of the base 56 on one side in the thickness direction.
  • the shaft 66 When the shaft 66 is rotated by the driving force from the moving table drive unit 62, the ball nut fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66 moves in the X direction, and the moving table 61 is set in the guide means 64 and X Move in the direction. As the moving table 61 moves in the X direction, the cleaning blade 1, the blade mounting portion 29, and the master 45 move in the X direction. In this way, the transport section 46 is arranged in the X direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66. Transport appendix 29 and master unit 45.
  • the distance adjusting means 72 moves the cleaning blade 1 to move the first distance D1, which is the distance between the position in the first direction 84 of the blade member 2 shown in FIG. 11 described later and the first reference position 84a, and the blade member.
  • the second distance D2 which is the distance between the position of 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a, is adjusted.
  • the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 is the position of the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84
  • the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 is the second position 85. This is the position of the edge portion 2 a of the blade member 2 in the direction 85.
  • the interval adjusting means 72 is configured to be able to move the cleaning blade 1 held by the holding means 65 in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • the interval adjusting means 72 includes a micrometer head 72a and a holding member (not shown) that holds the micrometer head 72a.
  • the micrometer head 72a is operated by an operator.
  • the micrometer head 72a may be driven by driving means controlled by the processing unit 52. By using the micrometer head 72a, the amount of movement of the tail blade 1 can be reduced, so that the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 can be adjusted more easily.
  • two interval adjusting means 72 are provided.
  • One of the two distance adjusting means 72 is provided so as to be in contact with one end in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 in the stationary state, and the other is disposed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 in the stationary state. It is provided to touch.
  • the two interval adjusting means 72 by providing the two interval adjusting means 72 and moving the tiling blade 1 at both ends to adjust the first interval D1 and the second interval D2, the first interval D1 over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is achieved.
  • the second interval D2 can be adjusted.
  • the base 56 is plate-shaped and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the first imaging unit 43, the second imaging unit 44, the support unit 55, the transport unit 46, and the guide unit 64 are provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the base 56.
  • Legs 71 are provided on the surface of the base 56 on the other side in the thickness direction. The base 56 is installed in the work place via the legs 71.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the master 45 provided in the positioning device 40 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 10 corresponds to a view of the prototype 45 viewed from the other side in the Y direction.
  • Figure 10 also shows the cleaning blade 1 together.
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged side view showing the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 of the prototype 45 shown in FIG. 7 in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 11, only the blade member 2 is shown as the cleaning blade 1.
  • the prototype 45 includes a first knife 81, a second knife 82, and a knife holding member 83 that holds the first knife 81 and the second knife 82.
  • the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 are attached to the knife holding member 83 by, for example, an adhesive.
  • the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 have a flat plate shape, and a cross-sectional shape on a virtual plane perpendicular to the thickness direction is a rectangular shape.
  • the first knife 81 is provided so as to extend in the X direction so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the X direction. As shown in FIG. 10, the length of the first knife 81 in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the length of the cleaning blade 1 in the longitudinal direction. , C so as to face the middle part.
  • the first knife 81 is an intermediate portion between both end portions in the longitudinal direction, and a portion facing the central portion B between both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is cut out, so that the cut-out portion 8 la Is formed.
  • three second knives 82 are provided.
  • the three second knives 82 are provided so as to face both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the tally wing blade 1 and a central portion B between both end portions A and C, respectively.
  • the second knife 82a for the other end provided so as to face the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and one end provided so as to face the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1.
  • the second knife for part 82c is exposed at a portion where the first knife 81 is not provided when viewed from the other side in the Y direction.
  • the second knife 82b for the central portion provided so as to face the central portion B between the two end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is viewed from the other side in the Y direction.
  • the first knife 81 is exposed through the notch 81a.
  • the first camera 47 of the first imaging unit 43 shown in FIG. It is provided so as to face the other end portion in the longitudinal direction, and images a portion near the other end portion A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the other end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81.
  • the second camera 48 It is provided so as to face the second knife 82a for the other end, and images the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the second knife 82a for the other end.
  • the third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44 is provided so as to face one end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81, the portion near the longitudinal end portion C of the cleaning blade 1 and the one end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81.
  • the fourth camera 50 is provided so as to face the second knife 82c for one end, and images the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the second knife 82c for one end.
  • the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are imaged by the third force lens 49 and the fourth camera 50 while being conveyed in one direction in the X direction. More specifically, the third camera 49 images the remaining part excluding the notch part 81a in the longitudinal direction of the first nifty 81 and the cleaning blade 1 facing the remaining part.
  • the fourth camera 50 is for the central portion exposed at the notch portion 81a of the first knife 81 when the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 is conveyed to the position facing the fourth camera 50.
  • the cleaning blade 1 facing the second knife 82b and the central second knife 82b is imaged. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 can be imaged over the entire length.
  • the first knife 81 is provided at a distance D1 from the set contact position 90 described above in a first direction 84 determined in advance.
  • the second knife 82 is generally suspended in the first direction 84.
  • the direction and the second direction are substantially perpendicular ”means that the angle formed by the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is 0.
  • the angle 0 formed by the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is about 74 °.
  • the first direction 84 matches the Z direction.
  • the second direction 85 coincides with the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • a first knife edge portion 81b that is a free end portion of the first knife 81 indicates a first reference position 84a that serves as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade 1 in the first direction 84.
  • a second knife edge portion 82d, which is a free end portion of the second knife 82, indicates a second reference position 85a that serves as a positioning reference in the second direction 85 of the cleaning blade 1.
  • the first knife 81 has a distance D1 from the set contact position 90 in the first direction 84.
  • the second knife 82 is held by a master holding means (not shown) so as to be spaced from the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85 by a distance D2.
  • the distance D1 between the first reference position 84a in the direction 84 and the set contact position 90 is, for example, 0.5
  • the distance D2 between the second reference position 85a and the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85 is set to be not less than 0.7 mm and not more than 0.8 mm, for example.
  • the first camera 47 of the first imaging unit 43 serving as the first position detecting means is arranged so that the optical axis 47a of the lens is perpendicular to the first direction 84.
  • the first camera 47 detects the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 and the first reference position 84a by imaging the blade member 2 and the first niff 81.
  • the second camera 48 of the first imaging unit 43 serving as the second position detecting means is arranged so that the optical axis 48a of the lens is perpendicular to the second direction 85.
  • the second camera 48 detects the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a by imaging the blade member 2 and the second knife 82.
  • Images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48 are displayed on the display unit 53 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 52 binarizes each of the multi-tone images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48 and displays them on the display unit 53 as a binarized image.
  • the processing unit 52 obtains a first interval D1 that is an interval between the blade member 2 and the first reference position 84a in the first direction 84 from the image information of the image captured by the first camera 47, and captures the image.
  • the image is displayed on the display unit 53 together with the displayed image.
  • the processing unit 52 obtains the second interval D2 that is the interval between the blade member 2 and the second reference position 85a in the second direction 85 from the image information of the image captured by the second camera 48, and the image is captured. The image is displayed on the display unit 53 together with the image.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is moved by the operator operating the interval adjusting unit 72 based on the image displayed on the display unit 53, and cleaning in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting unit 29 is performed.
  • the position of blade 1 is adjusted. More specifically, the cleaning blade 1 includes the first interval D1 within the range defined in advance in the image captured by the first camera 47, and the second interval in the image captured by the second camera 48. It is moved and positioned by the interval adjusting means 72 so that D2 is included in a predetermined range. Thus, the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are not used.
  • the blade edge portion 2a can be more reliably positioned at the set contact position 90.
  • the predetermined range in which the first interval D1 should be included includes an allowable range that is predetermined based on the interval D1 between the first reference position 84a and the set contact position 90 in the first direction 84.
  • the distance D1 is 0.5 mm or more and 0.6 mm or less.
  • the range of ⁇ 50; ⁇ ⁇ is an allowable range with respect to the interval D1
  • the first interval D1 is
  • the predefined range to be included is (D1 — 50); z m or more (D1 + 50) m or less
  • the predetermined range in which the second distance D2 should be included is determined in advance based on the distance D2 between the second reference position 85a and the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85.
  • the distance D2 is 0.7 mm or more 0.8.
  • the allowable range is ⁇ 50 m with respect to the distance D2.
  • the pre-defined range that should include the second interval D2 is (D2 ⁇ 50) m or more (D2 +
  • the blade edge portion 2a is observed from two directions, and the distance between the blade edge portion 2a and the reference positions 84a and 85a in both the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is Dl, D2.
  • the position of the cleaning blade 1 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is adjusted so that is included in a predetermined range. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 can be more reliably positioned in a state in which the blade edge portion 2a is positioned at the set contact position 90.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing how the position of the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • FIG. 12 the blade member 2 when the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the blade member 2 'when the blade edge portion 2a is displaced from the set contact position 90 is shown. Shown in solid line.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted so that the first distance D1 is included in a predetermined range.
  • the blade edge 2a may not be positioned at the set contact position 90.
  • the blade edge 2a If the distance D2 ′ between the blade member 2 ′ and the second reference position 85a in the second direction 85 is not included in the predetermined range, the blade in the first direction 84 The distance D1 ′ between the member 2 ′ and the first reference position 84a may be included within a predetermined range. Therefore, even if the blade edge portion 2a is not located at the set contact position 90, it is determined that the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90, and the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90. There is a risk of positioning in the state.
  • the blade edge portion 2a is positioned at the set contact position 90, and is positioned in a state where The cleaning blade 1 may be attached to the blade attachment portion 29.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is positioned based on the distance between the position of the blade member 2 in two directions and the reference position as described above, the position of the blade member 2 in one direction and the reference position are determined. Compared with the case of positioning based only on the interval, the blade edge 2a can be more reliably arranged at the set contact position 90, and the tiling blade 1 can be positioned and attached with high accuracy.
  • the second imaging unit 44 is configured similarly to the first imaging unit 43. More specifically, as with the first camera 47, the third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44, which is another first position detection means, is arranged so that the optical axis of the lens is perpendicular to the first direction 84. Placed in. As with the second camera 48, the fourth camera 50 of the second imaging unit 44, which is another second position detection means, is arranged so that the optical axis of the lens is perpendicular to the second direction 85. . Similar to the images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48, the images captured by the third camera 49 and the fourth camera 50 are also displayed on the display unit 53 shown in FIG. 6 described above. Is done.
  • the display unit 53 displays the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 obtained by the processing unit 52, respectively. Accordingly, even in the vicinity of one end portion C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 where the second imaging unit 44 is provided, the tailing blade 1 is based on the distance between the position of the blade member 2 in two directions and the reference position. Can be positioned.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is positioned in the vicinity of both longitudinal ends A and C where the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are provided.
  • the edge portion 2a can be positioned and positioned at the set contact position 90 more easily over the entire longitudinal direction of the blade member 2.
  • the positioning device 40 causes the second imaging unit 44 to image the tally blade 1 and the master 45 while the transport unit 46 transports the cleaning blade 1 and the master 45 in the X direction. More specifically, the third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44 images the remaining portion excluding the cutout portion 81a in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81 and the cleaning blade 1 facing the remaining portion, The camera 50 images the cleaning blade 1 facing the second knife 82b for the central portion and the second knife 82b for the central portion exposed at the notch 81a of the first knife 81. From the image information of the image thus captured, the processing unit 52 obtains the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and displays them on the display unit 53.
  • the operator determines whether or not the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in a predetermined range over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are determined.
  • the interval D2 can be adjusted to fall within a predefined range. Accordingly, since the blade edge portion 2a can be more reliably disposed and positioned at the set contact position 90 over the entire longitudinal direction of the blade member 2, the mounting accuracy of the cleaning blade 1 can be improved.
  • the conveying unit 46 and the second imaging unit 44 are arranged such that the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 and the first reference position 84a are arranged over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1.
  • the interval detector is configured to detect the first interval D1 that is the interval between the second direction D2 and the second interval D2 that is the interval between the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a method for attaching the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. Installation of the cleaning blade 1 is started in step sO.
  • step si a plurality of spacers having different thicknesses and inclination angles ⁇ 2 are prepared, such as the spacer 4 shown in FIG. 1 and the spacer 31 shown in FIG.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 becomes the set contact angle, and the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 Select the spacer so that is in the predetermined position.
  • the selection of the spacer is based on, for example, a live-action test in which the cleaning blade 1 to which each spacer is fixed is attached to the force cartridge 10 and mounted on the image forming apparatus, and sample images are continuously formed on recording paper. Can be done. In this live-action test, it is attached when the formed image has few image defects such as sweeping unevenness and the film thickness of the photosensitive drum 11 is small.
  • the spacer is selected as a spacer in which the contact angle ⁇ 1 becomes the set contact angle and the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 is a predetermined position.
  • the cleaning blade 1 is temporarily fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 with the spacer selected in this way interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. Thereby, the attitude of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 are defined. At this time, the cleaning blade 1 is not completely fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 but is fixed in a movable state in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. In this way, the temporary wing blade 1 is temporarily fixed, and the process proceeds to step s2.
  • Steps s2 to s5 are executed by the positioning device 40 shown in FIGS.
  • step s2 it is determined whether or not the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range.
  • the operator determines whether or not the force is within the range in which the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are defined based on an image displayed on the display unit 53 of the positioning device 40.
  • the vicinity of both ends A and C of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 of the positioning device 40 while the cleaning blade 1 is stationary.
  • the operator displays From the image displayed in the section 53, it is determined whether or not the first interval Dl and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range.
  • step s2 If it is determined in step s2 that both the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range, the process proceeds to step s3, and at least one of the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 If it is determined that is not included in the specified range, the process proceeds to step s4. In step s4, the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are adjusted by moving the cleaning blade 1 by the interval adjusting means 72, and the process returns to step s2.
  • step s3 it is determined whether or not the force is included in a range in which the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are defined over the entire longitudinal direction of the tail blade 1.
  • the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are transported in one direction in the X direction by the transport unit 46, and at a constant interval in the intermediate portion between both ends A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1.
  • the first interval D1 is obtained, and the second interval D2 is obtained at the central portion B between both end portions of the cleaning blade 1 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the interval for obtaining the first interval D 1 can be adjusted by, for example, the conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 46 and the imaging interval by the second imaging unit 44.
  • step s5 as in step s4 described above, the cleaning blade 1 is moved by the interval adjusting means 72 to adjust the first interval D1 and the second interval D2, and the process returns to step s3.
  • the side in contact with the photosensitive drum 11 from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 3 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 More specifically, the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the short direction of the blade member 2 is set so that the position in the short direction of the blade member 2 that is the direction facing the end of the blade member 2 is a predetermined position.
  • the position of the blade holder 3 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is defined by the notch 8 described above.
  • step s6 the cleaning block is determined in step s6. Fix raid 1 to blade mounting part 29 with mounting screw 30 and proceed to step s7. At step s7, installation of cleaning blade 1 is completed.
  • the position and posture of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 are adjusted by the thickness and the inclination angle ⁇ 2 of the spacer that is the defining member, and further parallel.
  • the blade member 2 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 by adjusting the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade attachment portion 29 by the notch 8 serving as a position defining means. 2 can be accurately attached to the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the cleaning blade 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
  • the blade holder 101 which is a blade support member is formed with a holder-side positioning hole 102 which is a flat and oval long hole.
  • the blade holder 101 has the same configuration as the blade holder 3 in the first embodiment except that a holder-side positioning hole 102 is formed instead of the holder-side screw hole 3a.
  • the holder side positioning hole 102 is formed to extend in the short direction of the blade holder 101.
  • the holder side positioning hole 102 prevents the blade holder 101 from moving in the longitudinal direction and allows movement in the short direction.
  • the spacer 103 is formed with a spacer-side positioning hole 104 corresponding to the holder-side positioning hole 102, which is a flat and oval long hole.
  • Spacer 103 has the same configuration as spacer 4 in the first embodiment except that spacer-side positioning hole 104 is formed instead of spacer-side screw hole 4a.
  • the blade holder 101 includes a holder side positioning hole 102 and a spacer side positioning hole 10. It is fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 by mounting screws 30 such as screw screws passed through 4. By moving the blade holder 101 in the short direction and adjusting and fixing the position in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 which is the short direction, the reference of the blade mounting portion 29 By adjusting the position of the blade edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the surface, the amount of the blade member 2 entering the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted. In this way, the holder-side positioning hole 102 is in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 and comes into contact with the photosensitive drum 11 from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 101. The direction in which the blade holder 101 is directed toward the end, that is, the position of the blade holder 101 in the short direction is defined.
  • the holder side positioning hole 102 constitutes a parallel position defining means.
  • the position of the blade holder 101 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted in the same manner as when the notch 8 is used. .
  • the blade holder 101 can be moved in a wider range in the short direction than when using the notch 8, so the blade edge 2a can be set more reliably.
  • the cleaning blade 100 of this embodiment has the same notch 8 as in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, the notch 8 can be inserted with a positioning projection provided on the housing 15.
  • the blade holder 101 is formed in a shape and dimensions that do not hinder the movement of the blade holder 101 in the short direction allowed by the holder-side positioning hole 102.
  • FIG. 15 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 110 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a side view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 17A is a front view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15,
  • FIG. 17B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15,
  • FIG. 17C is a plan view of the tiling blade 110 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 15 is a virtual plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 110, and corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the virtual plane including the cutting plane line II of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 17A.
  • FIG. 16 corresponds to a right side view of the cleaning blade 110.
  • Figures 15, 16, and 17A-17C are for ease of understanding. For the sake of simplicity, a part of the thickness is omitted.
  • the cleaning blade 110 of this embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
  • a protruding portion 111 as a defining member is formed in a blade holder 112 which is a blade support member.
  • the protruding portion 111 is integrally formed with the blade holder 112 by punching a plate-like member that becomes the blade holder 112 so as to protrude to one side in the thickness direction.
  • the protruding portion 111 is formed in a cylindrical shape.
  • the protruding portion 111 is formed by, for example, burring.
  • burring When forming the protruding portion 111 by burring, for example, a pilot hole is formed in the plate member that becomes the blade holder 112, and the plate member at the opening end of the pilot hole is bent to one side in the thickness direction.
  • the protruding portion 111 can be formed.
  • the blade holder 112 further has a first notch 114 and a second notch 8b.
  • the first notch 114 is formed by, for example, a burring cage, like the protruding portion 111.
  • First notch 114 is formed in the same manner as first notch 8a in the first embodiment described above.
  • the blade holder 112 has a long hole 115 that communicates with the first notch 114 and extends in the short direction.
  • the first notch 114, the second notch 8b, and the long hole 115 constitute a parallel position defining means, and are provided on the reference surface of the blade mounting part 29 in the same manner as the notch 8 in the first embodiment.
  • the position of the blade holder 112 in the parallel direction is defined.
  • the cleaning blade 110 further includes a seal member 113.
  • the seal member 113 is provided on the surface portion where the protruding portion 111 of the blade holder 112 is formed so as to surround the protruding portion 111. By providing the seal member 113, it is possible to prevent toner from entering between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 112 in the cartridge 116 shown in FIG.
  • the cleaning blade 110 is manufactured as follows, for example. A plate-like member that becomes the blade holder 112 is punched so as to protrude to one side in the thickness direction by burring or the like to form a protruding portion 111, and further, the first notch 114 and the second notch The notch 8b is formed to produce the blade holder 112. Next, the blade member 2 is affixed to the surface portion of the blade holder 112 on which the protruding portion 111 is formed, and a seal member 113 is provided so as to surround the protruding portion 111 of the blade holder 112. As a result, a tally blade 110 is obtained.
  • the cleaning blade 110 in which the defining member is integrally formed with the blade holder 112 as the projecting portion 111 engages the spacer 4 with the blade holder 3 like the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary, it can be attached to the housing 15 more easily than when the spacer 4 is engaged with the blade holder 3. Further, since the protruding portion 111 can be easily formed by a burring cage or the like, the manufacturing cost of the cleaning blade i 10 can be reduced.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 116 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
  • the cartridge 116 of the present embodiment is similar to the cartridge 10 of the second embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
  • the cartridge 116 is the same as the cartridge 10 of the second embodiment except that the cartridge 116 includes the cleaning device 117 including the cleaning blade 110 having the protruding portion 111 shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 17A to 17C. Have the same configuration.
  • the cleaning blade 110 having the protruding portion 111 is mounted such that the protruding portion 111 is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 112, like the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment.
  • the position of the blade edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 and the contact angle ⁇ 1 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted by the protruding portion 111.
  • the open end of the protruding portion 111 is parallel to a virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112, but like the protruding portion 118 shown in FIG.
  • the blade holder 112 may be formed so as to be inclined with respect to an imaginary plane including a surface portion that supports the blade member 2.
  • the opening end portion of the projecting portion 118 is inclined with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion supporting the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112, and more specifically, the opening end portion of the projecting portion 118 is formed into the blade member.
  • the blade holder 112 moves away from or closer to the blade holder 112.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 can be easily adjusted to the set contact angle as in the case of using the inclined spacer 31 shown in FIG. More specifically, the contact angle ⁇ 1 can be adjusted by the inclination angle ⁇ 3 of the opening end portion of the protruding portion 118 with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112.
  • FIG. 19 shows a case where the opening end portion of the protruding portion 118 is formed so as to be separated from the blade holder 112 as it approaches the blade member 2.
  • the protruding portion 118 whose opening end portion is inclined is formed in, for example, a pilot hole formed in the plate-like member serving as the blade holder 112 similarly to the protruding portion 111 shown in FIG.
  • the cleaning blade 110 of the present embodiment is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 in the same manner as the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment.
  • the cleaning blade 110 is attached in the same manner as the cleaning blade according to the fourth embodiment shown in FIG.
  • step si shown in FIG. 13 instead of the plurality of spacers, the height of the protruding portion and the protruding portion 111 shown in FIG. 15 and the protruding portion 118 shown in FIG.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 becomes the set contact angle and is perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 in the same manner as the selection of the spacer.
  • the cleaning blade is selected so that the position of the blade member 2 in the direction is a predetermined position. Temporarily fix the selected cleaning blade to the blade mounting portion 29, and proceed to step s2. The steps after step s2 are performed in the same manner as the mounting of the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment described above.
  • the position and posture of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 are determined by the height of the protruding portion and the inclination angle ⁇ 3. And adjust the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 using the first cutout portion 114, the second cutout portion 8b, and the long hole 115 to clean the blade. Since the blade member is attached to the cartridge, the blade member 2 can be accurately attached to the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it.
  • the adjustment method is not limited to this.
  • a holder-side positioning hole 102 that is a long hole is formed, the blade holder is moved in the short direction, and the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is formed. It may be adjusted by adjusting and fixing the position at. Thereby, the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade attachment portion 29 can be adjusted more easily.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 120 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the cleaning blade 120 of this embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
  • FIG. 20 shows a state where the cleaning blade 120 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 with the attachment screw 30. Also, in FIG. 20, the engaging portion 9 of the spacer 4 shown in FIG. 1 is omitted because the drawing is complicated and difficult to understand.
  • the cleaning blade 120 of this embodiment has two tilt adjusting screwdrivers 121a and 121b and two tilt adjusting screws 122a and 122b.
  • the two inclination adjusting screw holes 121a and 121b and the two inclination adjusting screws 122a and 122b constitute a posture adjusting means 125.
  • the two tilt adjustment screw holes 121a and 121b are the first tilt adjustment screw hole 121a and the second tilt adjustment screw hole formed on both sides of the opening end of the holder side screw hole 3a in the short direction of the blade holder 3. Includes screw holes 121b.
  • the first inclination adjusting screw hole 121a is formed by an adjusting holder screw hole 124a provided in the blade holder 3 and a screw hole of the nut portion 123a.
  • the second inclination adjusting screw hole 121b is provided for adjusting the blade holder 3.
  • the holder screw hole 124b and the screw hole of the nut portion 123b are formed.
  • the screw holes of the nut portions 123a and 123b are formed in the nut portions 123a and 123b of the blade holder 3 by, for example, a tap carriage.
  • the inclination adjusting screws 122a and 122b are, for example, screw screws.
  • the posture adjusting means 125 is a length of a portion of the first inclination adjusting screw 122a that is screwed into the first inclination adjusting screw hole 121a and protruding from the blade holder 3 to the blade mounting portion 29 side (hereinafter referred to as “first Dl) and the length of the portion of the second inclination adjusting screw 122b that is screwed into the second inclination adjusting screw hole 121b from the blade holder 3 to the blade mounting portion 29 side (hereinafter referred to as “screw protruding length”).
  • the posture of the blade holder 3 can be adjusted by adjusting d2 respectively. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the surface of one side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3 where the first screw protrusion length dl and the second screw protrusion length d2 are substantially equal is substantially parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29.
  • the blade holder 3 is elastically deformed in the direction of the arrow 126.
  • the surface on the one side in the thickness direction of the holder 3 can be inclined with respect to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. Thereby, the contact angle ⁇ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted.
  • the blade holder 3 can be elastically deformed in the direction of the arrow 126 by the posture adjusting means 125 and the posture of the blade holder 3 can be adjusted.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 can be adjusted to the set contact angle more reliably. Therefore, as compared with the case where the posture adjusting means 125 is not provided, the blade member 2 can be attached with higher accuracy by the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it. .
  • the spacer is the spacer 4 formed to have a uniform thickness, but is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Even an inclined spacer 31.
  • the contact angle ⁇ 1 is more reliably adjusted to the set contact angle by further providing the posture adjusting means 125. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member 2 can be further improved.
  • the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 was manufactured.
  • a cartridge was manufactured by using the obtained talung blade 1.
  • the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15 was manufactured.
  • a cartridge was manufactured using the resulting cleaning blade 110.
  • a cartridge was manufactured using the cleaning blade 140 according to the prior art shown in FIG.
  • a blade holder having a surface-treated steel plate force was used as the blade support member 141, and a blade member having a thermosetting polyurethane force was used as the blade member 142.
  • a cartridge was manufactured using the mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130 shown in FIG.
  • a blade holder having a surface-treated steel plate force was used as the blade support member 131, and the blade member 132 was formed of thermosetting polyurethane.
  • the cartridges of Examples 1 and 2 have the same cumulative error as the cartridge using the cleaning blade 130 of the mold-integrated molding type of Reference Example 1, and are comparative examples. Compared with the cartridge using the cleaning blade 140 of the prior art 1), it can be seen that the cumulative error is small and the mounting accuracy is excellent.
  • a cleaning blade 1 similar to that in Example 3 is prepared, and after adjusting the posture of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 by the spacer 4, the blade mounting portion 29 by the positioning device 40 is adjusted.
  • a cartridge was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the cleaning blade 1 was attached to the blade mounting portion 29 without adjusting the position of the cleaning blade 1 in the direction parallel to the reference plane.
  • Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 A print test was conducted in which sample images were continuously formed on 30,000 sheets of recording paper.
  • As the toner a toner having a volume average particle diameter of 5.8 m manufactured by a polymerization method was used. The image formed on the recording paper was visually observed to determine whether an image defect such as black streak occurred.
  • an image defect occurred when printing on 10,000 sheets of recording paper, and the printing test was terminated at that point.
  • the contact position between the cleaning blade and the photosensitive drum was visually observed to evaluate which part of the cleaning blade was in contact with the photosensitive drum.
  • the cleaning blade was taken out and magnified 175 times with an optical microscope, and the edge portion 2a of blade member 2 and the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction shown in FIG. 2b was observed. From the observation results, the toner 1 slips through the edge 2a of the blade member 2 and comes close to the photosensitive drum of the blade member 2 V and adheres to the surface portion 2b of the side V. Judged whether or not.
  • the cleaning blade of Example 3 shows that the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is in contact with the photosensitive drum and can be attached at an appropriate position. It was.
  • the cleaning blade of Comparative Example 2 was found to be in the abutting state where the drum-side surface portion 2b of the blade member 2 was in contact with the photosensitive drum 11, as indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 23B. It was.
  • the type of adhesive for bonding the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3, the presence / absence of the primer treatment to the blade holder 3 and the type of primer treatment are changed.
  • the adhesive strength between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
  • the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 was manufactured.
  • an adhesive between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3 a mixture of an EVA hot melt adhesive and a PA hot melt adhesive was used.
  • a tiling blade 1 was produced in the same manner as in Test Example 1 except that a PUR hot melt adhesive was used instead of a mixture of an EVA hot melt adhesive and a PA hot melt adhesive.
  • Test Example 1 except that the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side to which the blade member 2 is attached is subjected to a primer treatment (hereinafter referred to as “primer treatment A”) that applies a phenolic primer and then the blade member 2 is attached.
  • primer treatment A a primer treatment that applies a phenolic primer and then the blade member 2 is attached.
  • a cleaning blade 1 was produced in the same manner as described above. The primer was applied by datebing.
  • primer treatment B Except for applying the silane coupling agent primer on the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached (hereinafter referred to as primer treatment B), and then attaching the blade member 2 A cleaning blade 1 was produced in the same manner as in Test Example 1.
  • the primer was applied by datebing.
  • the 90 ° peeling test conforms to the Japanese Industrial Standard (abbreviated as JIS) K6854-1 and is directed to the blade holder 2 from the blade member 2 shown in FIG.
  • the force was applied in the direction indicated by arrow 150, and the average peel force of blade member 2 was measured at a peel speed of 500 mmZ.
  • the blade member 2 side of the blade holder 3 is attached to the blade member 2 in the direction of arrow 150 in a high temperature and high humidity (HH) environment at a temperature of 45 ° C and a relative humidity of 85%.
  • HH high temperature and high humidity
  • the plate was left for 3 months in a bent state so that the distance ⁇ between the virtual plane including the surface of the blade and the blade edge portion 2a was 1.7 mm. After leaving, the blade member 2 was visually observed, and the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
  • Test Examples 1 to 4 The cleaning blades obtained in Test Examples 1 to 4 were each attached to the cartridge, and the obtained cartridge was stored in a dry heat environment at a temperature of 45 ° C for 6 months, and then attached to a commercially available laser beam printer, and a sample was obtained. A print test was performed in which images were continuously formed on 10,000 sheets of recording paper. After the printing test, the cleaning blade was taken out and visually observed, and the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
  • Table 3 shows the evaluation results of (a) to (e) above.
  • Comparison between Test Example 1 and Test Example 2 shows that the use of PUR-based hot melt adhesive compared to the blade member 2 compared to the case of using a mixture of EVA-based hot melt adhesive and PA-based hot melt adhesive. It can be seen that peeling of the base end, which is the end opposite to the edge 2a in the short direction, can be suppressed. Further, from comparison between Test Example 2 and Test Examples 3 and 4, it can be said that by applying primer treatment to the blade holder 3, the adhesive force S between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3 is improved.
  • the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • a small particle size toner it is possible to prevent the toner slipping phenomenon and to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.
  • the defining member can be accurately formed in a desired shape, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be improved.
  • the blade support member can be inclined and attached to the blade mounting portion by the spacer that is the defining member, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the defining member is a protruding portion formed integrally with the blade support member, the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attaching portion. Further, since the defining member can be formed more easily, the manufacturing cost of the cleaning blade can be reduced.
  • the blade support member can be inclined and attached to the blade attachment portion by the projecting portion which is the defining member, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with higher accuracy.
  • the posture of the blade support member can be more reliably adjusted to a predetermined posture by the posture adjusting means when attached to the blade attachment portion, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the position of the blade support member is defined by the parallel position defining means. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the blade supporting member is provided with the blade member and the spacer on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge, and the spacer is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member.
  • a tiling blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained.
  • the blade member can be accurately attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. it can.
  • the blade supporting member is provided with the blade member on the side facing the cartridge mounting portion and has the protruding portion, and the protruding portion is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member to support the blade. It is possible to obtain a tally wing blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion. Therefore, since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the protruding portion, the blade member can be accurately attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. .
  • the present invention it is possible to reduce the influence of an error on the attachment position of the blade member as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. Therefore, the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • the attitude of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be easily defined by the spacer. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the image carrier strength toner and cleaning it.
  • the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
  • the cleaning blade is parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion.
  • the blade member is parallel so that the position of the blade member in the direction facing the end of the blade member attached to the blade support member to the end of the blade abutting on the image carrier is a predetermined position.
  • the position of the blade support member is further defined by the position defining means. Thereby, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
  • the operator moves the cleaning blade by the interval adjusting unit based on the output result of the output unit, thereby the interval between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the blade
  • the distance between the position of the member in the second direction and the second reference position can be adjusted. Accordingly, since the cleaning blade can be positioned so that the blade member is disposed at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it, the blade member can be attached with high accuracy.
  • the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. It is possible to obtain a cartridge that is accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.

Abstract

A cleaning blade in which a blade member can be accurately installed. The blade member (2) is stuck on the surface of the blade holder (3) of the cleaning blade (1) on the side facing a blade mounting part (29). A spacer (4) is interposed between the blade holder (3) and the blade mounting part (29). Since the cleaning blade (1) can define the attitude of the plate holder (3) and the distance thereof from the blade mounting part (29) by the spacer (4), the blade member (2) can be accurately installed at the position suitable for removing toner from a photosensitive drum (11) for cleaning.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
クリーニングブレードおよびその製造方法、クリーニングブレードの取付方 法および位置決め装置、ならびにカートリッジ  Cleaning blade and manufacturing method thereof, cleaning blade mounting method and positioning device, and cartridge
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、画像形成装置において像担持体に当接して設けられ像担持体を清掃 するクリーニングブレードおよびその製造方法、クリーニングブレードの取付方法およ び位置決め装置、ならびにカートリッジに関する。  The present invention relates to a cleaning blade that is provided in contact with an image carrier in an image forming apparatus and cleans the image carrier, a method for manufacturing the same, a mounting method and a positioning device for a cleaning blade, and a cartridge.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 電子写真法によって画像を形成する画像形成装置は、プリンタなどとして使用され ている。前記画像形成装置は、感光体の表面部を帯電装置で帯電させた後、露光 することによって静電潜像を形成し、形成された静電潜像を現像装置で現像してトナ 一像を形成し、紙などの記録媒体に転写して定着させることによって画像を形成する 。トナー像を構成するトナーのうち、記録媒体に転写されずに感光体の表面部に残 留するトナーは、クリーニング装置によって除去される。クリーニング装置は、タリー- ングブレードのブレード部材を感光体に当接させることによってトナーを除去し、感光 体を清掃する。  An image forming apparatus that forms an image by electrophotography is used as a printer or the like. The image forming apparatus forms an electrostatic latent image by charging the surface portion of the photoreceptor with a charging device and then exposing it, and developing the formed electrostatic latent image with a developing device to form a toner image. An image is formed by forming and transferring and fixing to a recording medium such as paper. Of the toner constituting the toner image, the toner remaining on the surface of the photoreceptor without being transferred to the recording medium is removed by the cleaning device. The cleaning device removes the toner by bringing the blade member of the tally blade into contact with the photosensitive member, and cleans the photosensitive member.
感光体およびクリーニングブレードなどの部品は、繰返し使用されることによって摩 耗し、性能が劣化するので、新品との交換が必要である。これらの部品を容易に交換 するために、感光体およびクリーニングブレードなどの部品は、ハウジングに一体的 に組込まれ、カートリッジとして画像形成装置に着脱可能に設けられる。カートリッジ を交換することによって、感光体およびクリーニングブレードなどの劣化した部品を容 易に交換することができる。  Parts such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade are worn out by repeated use, and their performance deteriorates. Therefore, it is necessary to replace them with new ones. In order to easily replace these components, components such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade are integrally incorporated in the housing, and are detachably provided as a cartridge in the image forming apparatus. By replacing the cartridge, it is possible to easily replace deteriorated parts such as the photoconductor and the cleaning blade.
カートリッジの各部品を交換するときには、各部品をカートリッジの適切な位置に配 置することが求められる。たとえば、クリーニングブレードが適切な位置に配置されて いないと、感光体に対するブレード部材の付勢力が適切な値にならず、トナーの残 留またはブレード部材による感光体への掃きむらの発生などの問題が生じる。  When replacing each part of the cartridge, it is required to place each part in the appropriate position on the cartridge. For example, if the cleaning blade is not placed at an appropriate position, the biasing force of the blade member against the photoreceptor will not be at an appropriate value, causing problems such as residual toner or unevenness of the blade member on the photoreceptor. Occurs.
クリーニングブレードとしては、ゴムなどの弾性材料力も成るブレード部材を、剛性を 有する板金などのブレード支持部材に接着した接着タイプのクリーニングブレードが ある。また図 24に示すように、ブレード支持部材 131となる板金を金型に挿入し、こ の金型にブレード部材 132となるゴムなどの材料を流し込み、ブレード部材 132とブ レード支持部材 131とを一体成形した金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 13 0もある。金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130は、接着タイプのタリーニン グブレードに比べて、ブレード部材 132が剥がれにくいなどの長所を有することから、 多用されている(たとえば、特開 2004— 133261号公報 (第 3頁,第 3— 4図)参照)。 金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130を新しいクリーニングブレードに交 換する場合、金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130であれば適切な位置に 配置しやすいが、金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130には以下の問題 がある。金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130は、ブレード部材 132の作 製に金型が必要であることなどから、接着タイプのクリーニングブレードに比べて製造 原価が高い。またクリーニングブレードの形状および寸法は、画像形成装置の機種 毎に異なるので、各機種に適するクリーニングブレードをそれぞれ製造して交換する ことは困難である。したがって、交換用のクリーニングブレードとしては、接着タイプの クリーニングブレードが使用されている。 As a cleaning blade, a blade member that also has elastic material force such as rubber is used. There is an adhesion type cleaning blade adhered to a blade support member such as a sheet metal. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a metal plate to be the blade support member 131 is inserted into the mold, and a material such as rubber to be the blade member 132 is poured into the mold, so that the blade member 132 and the blade support member 131 are connected. There is also an integrally molded cleaning blade 130 that is integrally molded. The die-integrated cleaning blade 130 is widely used because it has advantages such as the blade member 132 being less likely to peel off than the adhesive-type tallying blade (see, for example, JP-A-2004-133261 (No. (See page 3, Figure 3-4)). When replacing the mold-integrated cleaning blade 130 with a new cleaning blade, the mold-integrated cleaning blade 130 can be easily placed in an appropriate position. Has the following problems. The die-integrated type cleaning blade 130 has a higher manufacturing cost than the adhesive-type cleaning blade because a die is necessary for the production of the blade member 132. In addition, since the shape and dimensions of the cleaning blade vary depending on the model of the image forming apparatus, it is difficult to manufacture and replace a cleaning blade suitable for each model. Therefore, an adhesive type cleaning blade is used as a replacement cleaning blade.
接着タイプのクリーニングブレードを用いる場合、ブレード支持部材が平板状である と、金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレードが装着されて 、たカートリッジに装着 したときにブレード部材の位置が変化する。したがって図 25に示すように、ブレード 支持部材 141を屈曲させて段差部 143を形成し、この段差部 143にブレード部材 14 2を貼付けたクリーニングブレード 140が用いられて!/、る。  When an adhesive type cleaning blade is used, if the blade support member has a flat plate shape, the position of the blade member changes when the die-integrated type cleaning blade is attached to the cartridge. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25, a blade support member 141 is bent to form a stepped portion 143, and a cleaning blade 140 having a blade member 142 attached to the stepped portion 143 is used!
ブレード支持部材 141の段差部 143にブレード部材 142を貼付けたクリーニングブ レード 140では、段差部 143の段差の程度によってブレード部材 142の位置を調整 するので、段差部 143の段差の程度に誤差が生じると、ブレード部材 142を適切な 位置に配置することができず、取付位置に誤差が生じる。またブレード部材 142がブ レード支持部材 141を基準として感光体 134と同じ側に配置されているので、ブレー ド部材 142の厚みおよびブレード部材 142とブレード支持部材 141とを接着する接 着層の厚みに誤差が生じると、ブレード部材 142の取付位置が適切な位置力もずれ る。またクリーニングブレード 140は、カートリッジのブレード取付部 133に、ブレード 支持部材 141のブレード部材 142を支持する側と反対側の表面部が接する状態で 取付けられるので、ブレード支持部材 141の平行度が低いと、ブレード部材 142の取 付位置が適切な位置力もずれることになる。またブレード支持部材 141の厚みに誤 差が生じても、ブレード部材 142の取付位置のずれを招く。 In the cleaning blade 140 in which the blade member 142 is attached to the stepped portion 143 of the blade support member 141, the position of the blade member 142 is adjusted according to the level of the stepped portion 143. Therefore, an error occurs in the level of the stepped portion 143. Then, the blade member 142 cannot be disposed at an appropriate position, and an error occurs in the mounting position. Further, since the blade member 142 is disposed on the same side as the photoconductor 134 with respect to the blade support member 141, the thickness of the blade member 142 and the thickness of the adhesive layer that bonds the blade member 142 and the blade support member 141 together. If an error occurs, the mounting position of the blade member 142 will deviate properly. The Further, since the cleaning blade 140 is attached to the blade attachment portion 133 of the cartridge in a state where the surface portion of the blade support member 141 opposite to the side supporting the blade member 142 is in contact, the parallelism of the blade support member 141 is low. As a result, the mounting position of the blade member 142 is also displaced by an appropriate position force. Even if an error occurs in the thickness of the blade support member 141, the attachment position of the blade member 142 is displaced.
また交換前にカートリッジに装着されていたクリーニングブレードとブレード部材 14 2の材質が異なる場合、交換前に装着されていたブレード部材と同じ位置にブレード 部材 142を配置できたとしても、感光体 134に当接させたときのブレード部材 142の 倒れ方が変化することがある。またクリーニングブレードを交換するときには、感光体 134も新品に交換されるので、交換前に装着されていた感光体 134とブレード部材 1 42との位置関係力 交換後における感光体 134とブレード部材 142との最適な位置 関係になるとは限らない。  In addition, if the material of the cleaning blade and the blade member 142 are different from those installed in the cartridge before replacement, even if the blade member 142 can be placed at the same position as the blade member mounted before replacement, When the blade member 142 is brought into contact, the manner in which the blade member 142 falls may change. When the cleaning blade is replaced, the photoconductor 134 is also replaced with a new one. Therefore, the positional relationship between the photoconductor 134 and the blade member 142 that was mounted before the replacement is changed. It is not always the best position relationship.
またブレード部材 142の取付位置は、高画質ィ匕を目的として体積平均粒径がたと えば 10 m以下程度と小さい小粒径トナーが用いられる場合に特に問題となる。小 粒径トナーは、体積平均粒径が 10 mを超えるような大粒径トナーに比べて、ブレ 一ド部材 142および感光体 134から受ける摩擦力が小さい。したがって小粒径トナー が用いられる場合にブレード部材 142の取付精度が悪ぐブレード部材 142が適切 な位置に配置されていないと、トナーがブレード部材 142のエッジ部をすり抜けて、 ブレード部材 142の厚み方向一方側の表面部のうち感光体 134に近い側の表面部 に付着する、いわゆるトナーすり抜け現象が発生する。このトナーすり抜け現象を防 ぐために、小粒径トナーが用いられる場合には、ブレード部材の取付精度をさらに高 めることが求められる。  The attachment position of the blade member 142 is particularly problematic when a small particle size toner having a volume average particle size of about 10 m or less is used for the purpose of high image quality. The small particle size toner has a smaller frictional force from the blade member 142 and the photoreceptor 134 than the large particle size toner having a volume average particle size exceeding 10 m. Therefore, when a small particle size toner is used, if the blade member 142 is poorly mounted and the blade member 142 is not placed at an appropriate position, the toner will pass through the edge of the blade member 142 and the thickness of the blade member 142 will be reduced. A so-called toner slipping phenomenon occurs that adheres to the surface portion on the side close to the photoreceptor 134 of the surface portion on one side in the direction. In order to prevent this toner slipping phenomenon, when a small particle size toner is used, it is required to further increase the mounting accuracy of the blade member.
以上のようにブレード支持部材 141の段差部 143にブレード部材 142を貼付けたク リー-ングブレード 140は、段差部 143の寸法およびブレード部材 142の厚みの誤 差などによってブレード部材 142の取付位置が適切な位置力もずれやすぐ取付精 度が低くならざるを得な 、。したがって充分なクリーニング性能を発揮させることはで きない。特に小粒径トナーが用いられる場合には、トナーすり抜け現象を防ぐことが できず、画質の低下を招く。 発明の開示 As described above, in the cleaning blade 140 in which the blade member 142 is attached to the step portion 143 of the blade support member 141, the mounting position of the blade member 142 depends on the difference in the size of the step portion 143 and the thickness of the blade member 142. Appropriate positioning force will shift and mounting accuracy will soon be low. Therefore, sufficient cleaning performance cannot be exhibited. In particular, when a small particle size toner is used, the toner slip-through phenomenon cannot be prevented and the image quality is deteriorated. Disclosure of the invention
本発明の目的は、ブレード部材を精度良く取付けることのできるクリーニングブレー ドおよびその製造方法、前記クリーニングブレードの取付方法および位置決め装置、 ならびに前記クリーニングブレードが装着されたカートリッジを提供することである。 本発明は、像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像してト ナー像を形成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置に着 脱可能に設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材を像 担持体に当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードであって、 ブレード部材と、  An object of the present invention is to provide a cleaning blade capable of attaching a blade member with high accuracy, a method for manufacturing the same, a mounting method and a positioning device for the cleaning blade, and a cartridge equipped with the cleaning blade. The present invention is applied to an image forming apparatus that develops a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transfers the toner image to a recording medium to form an image. A cleaning blade that is attached to a blade mounting portion of a cartridge that can be provided and cleans the image carrier by bringing the blade member into contact with the image carrier, the blade member;
ブレード取付部に臨む側の表面部にブレード部材を支持するブレード支持部材と ブレード支持部材のブレード取付部に臨む側に突出して設けられ、ブレード取付 部とブレード支持部材との間に介在されることによって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢お よびブレード支持部材とブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を 規定する規定部材とを備えることを特徴とするクリーニングブレードである。  A blade support member that supports the blade member on the surface portion facing the blade mounting portion, and protrudes to the side of the blade support member facing the blade mounting portion, and is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade support member. And a defining member that defines at least one of the posture of the blade support member and the interval between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion.
本発明に従えば、クリーニングブレードは、ブレード支持部材のカートリッジのブレ 一ド取付部に臨む側にブレード部材と規定部材とを備える。規定部材は、ブレード取 付部とブレード支持部材との間に介在されることによって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢 およびブレード支持部材とブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方 を規定する。これによつて、ブレード部材の像担持体に対する位置および姿勢を規 定することができる。このとき、たとえば従来技術のようにブレード支持部材に段差部 を形成する必要がな 、ので、段差部の寸法誤差のブレード部材の取付位置に対す る影響を排除することができる。またブレード部材は、ブレード支持部材のブレード取 付部に臨む側の表面部に設けられるので、ブレード支持部材の平行度および厚み 寸法の誤差のブレード部材の取付位置に対する影響を排除することができる。また ブレード支持部材を基準にしてブレード部材が像担持体と反対側になるようにブレー ド取付部に取付けられることによって、ブレード部材の厚み寸法の誤差の影響を排除 することができる。このようにブレード支持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が 貼付けられた従来のクリーニングブレードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対す る誤差の影響が少な 、ので、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを除去して清掃す るのに適した位置に精度良く取付けることができる。また容易に取付けることができる 。また前述のようにブレード部材を精度良く取付けることができることによって、特に小 粒径トナーが用いられる場合に、トナーすり抜け現象を防止し、画質の低下を防ぐこ とがでさる。 According to the invention, the cleaning blade includes the blade member and the defining member on the side of the blade support member facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge. The defining member is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member, thereby defining at least one of the attitude of the blade supporting member and the distance between the blade supporting member and the blade mounting portion. Thereby, the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined. At this time, for example, it is not necessary to form a stepped portion on the blade support member as in the prior art, so that the influence of the dimensional error of the stepped portion on the mounting position of the blade member can be eliminated. Further, since the blade member is provided on the surface portion of the blade support member facing the blade attachment portion, the influence of the parallelism and thickness dimension error of the blade support member on the attachment position of the blade member can be eliminated. Further, by attaching the blade member to the blade mounting portion so that the blade member is opposite to the image carrier with respect to the blade support member, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the error in the thickness dimension of the blade member. Thus, the blade member is formed on the stepped portion formed on the blade support member. Compared to the conventional cleaning blade, the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member is small, so the blade member is accurately placed in a position suitable for cleaning by removing toner from the image carrier. Can be installed. It can also be installed easily. In addition, since the blade member can be attached with high accuracy as described above, the toner slipping phenomenon can be prevented and the image quality can be prevented from being deteriorated particularly when a small particle size toner is used.
また本発明において、規定部材は、スぺーサであることを特徴とする。  In the present invention, the defining member is a spacer.
本発明に従えば、規定部材は、スぺーサであるので、所望の形状に精度良く形成 することができる。したがって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持部材とブ レード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方をより精度良く規定することが できるので、ブレード部材の取付精度を向上させることができる。  According to the present invention, since the defining member is a spacer, it can be accurately formed into a desired shape. Accordingly, since at least one of the attitude of the blade support member and the interval between the blade support member and the blade attachment portion can be defined with higher accuracy, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be improved.
また本発明において、スぺーサは、ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面部が、 ブレード部材に近づくにつれてブレード支持部材力 離反またはブレード支持部材 に近接するように形成されることを特徴とする。  In the present invention, the spacer is formed such that the surface portion on the side attached to the blade attachment portion is separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as it approaches the blade member.
本発明に従えば、スぺーサは、ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面部が、ブレ 一ド部材に近づくにつれてブレード支持部材力 離反またはブレード支持部材に近 接するように形成される。これによつて、ブレード支持部材をブレード取付部に対して 傾斜させて取付けることができるので、ブレード支持部材の姿勢をより精度良く規定 することができる。したがって、ブレード部材の取付精度をさらに向上させることができ る。  According to the present invention, the spacer is formed such that the surface portion on the side attached to the blade attachment portion is separated from the blade support member force or closer to the blade support member as it approaches the blade member. As a result, the blade support member can be attached to the blade attachment portion while being inclined, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
また本発明において、規定部材は、ブレード支持部材を形成する板状部材にブレ 一ド取付部に臨むべく予め定める側に突出するように穿孔することによってブレード 支持部材と一体的に形成される突起部分であることを特徴とする。  In the present invention, the defining member is a protrusion formed integrally with the blade support member by perforating the plate-like member forming the blade support member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. It is a part.
本発明に従えば、規定部材は、ブレード支持部材を形成する板状部材にブレード 取付部に臨むべく予め定める側に突出するように穿孔することによってブレード支持 部材と一体的に形成される突起部分である。規定部材がブレード支持部材と一体的 に形成されることによって、ブレード取付部に対してクリーニングブレードをより容易に 取付けることができる。また規定部材をより容易に形成することができるので、タリー- ングブレードの製造原価を低減することができる。 According to the present invention, the defining member is a protrusion formed integrally with the blade support member by perforating the plate-like member forming the blade support member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. It is. By forming the defining member integrally with the blade support member, the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Also, since the defining member can be formed more easily, tally The manufacturing cost of the blade can be reduced.
また本発明において、突起部分は、筒状に形成され、  In the present invention, the protruding portion is formed in a cylindrical shape,
突起部分の開口端部は、ブレード部材に近づくにつれてブレード支持部材力 離 反またはブレード支持部材に近接するように形成されることを特徴とする。  The opening end of the protruding portion is formed so as to be separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as the blade member is approached.
本発明に従えば、規定部材である筒状の突起部分の開口端部は、ブレード部材に 近づくにつれてブレード支持部材力 離反またはブレード支持部材に近接するように 形成される。これによつて、ブレード支持部材をブレード取付部に対して傾斜させて 取付けることができるので、ブレード支持部材の姿勢をより精度良く規定することがで きる。したがって、ブレード部材を一層精度良く取付けることができる。  According to the present invention, the opening end portion of the cylindrical projecting portion which is the defining member is formed so as to be separated from the blade support member force or close to the blade support member as the blade member is approached. As a result, the blade support member can be attached to be inclined with respect to the blade attachment portion, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined more accurately. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with higher accuracy.
また本発明にお 、て、ブレード支持部材の姿勢を調整する姿勢調整手段をさらに 備えることを特徴とする。  The present invention is further characterized by further comprising posture adjusting means for adjusting the posture of the blade support member.
本発明に従えば、姿勢調整手段をさらに備えるので、ブレード取付部に取付けると きに姿勢調整手段によってブレード支持部材の姿勢をより確実に予め定める姿勢に 調整することができる。したがって、ブレード部材の取付精度を一層向上させることが できる。  According to the present invention, since the posture adjusting means is further provided, the posture of the blade support member can be more reliably adjusted to a predetermined posture by the posture adjusting means when attached to the blade mounting portion. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
また本発明にお 、て、ブレード取付部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき 基準面に平行な方向であって、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側 の端部力 像担持体に当接される側の端部に向力う方向におけるブレード支持部材 の位置を規定する平行位置規定手段をさらに備えることを特徴とする。  Further, in the present invention, the edge force on the side of the blade member attached to the blade support member in the direction parallel to the reference surface to which the cleaning blade of the blade attachment portion should be attached is brought into contact with the image carrier. It further comprises parallel position defining means for defining the position of the blade support member in the direction facing the end on the side.
本発明に従えば、平行位置規定手段をさらに備えるので、ブレード取付部の基準 面に平行な方向であって、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側の端 部から像担持体に当接される側の端部に向力う方向におけるブレード支持部材の位 置を平行位置規定手段によって規定することができる。したがって、ブレード部材の 取付精度をより一層向上させることができる。  According to the present invention, since the parallel position defining means is further provided, the blade is in contact with the image carrier from the end of the blade member on the side attached to the blade support member in the direction parallel to the reference surface. The position of the blade support member in the direction facing the end on the other side can be defined by the parallel position defining means. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
また本発明は、像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像し てトナー像を形成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置 に着脱可能に設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材 を像担持体に当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードの製 造方法であって、 The present invention is also detachable from an image forming apparatus for developing a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transferring the toner image to a recording medium to form an image. The cleaning blade is attached to the blade mounting portion of the cartridge provided in the cartridge and cleans the image carrier by bringing the blade member into contact with the image carrier. Manufacturing method,
ブレード支持部材のブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定められる側の表面部に、ブレ 一ド部材を貼付けるステップと、  A step of attaching a blade member to a surface portion of the blade support member on a predetermined side to face the blade mounting portion;
ブレード支持部材のブレード部材が貼付けられた側の表面部に、突出するようにス ぺーサを設けるステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの製造方法で ある。  And a step of providing a spacer so as to protrude from the surface portion of the blade support member on the side to which the blade member is affixed.
本発明に従えば、ブレード支持部材のブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定められる 側の表面部にブレード部材を貼付け、ブレード支持部材のブレード部材が貼付けら れた側の表面部に、突出するようにスぺーサを設けることによってクリーニングブレー ドが製造される。これによつて、ブレード支持部材のカートリッジのブレード取付部に 臨む側にブレード部材とスぺーサとを備え、スぺーサをブレード取付部とブレード支 持部材との間に介在させることによってブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持 部材とブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を規定することのでき るクリーニングブレードを得ることができる。このようなクリーニングブレードは、スぺー サによってブレード部材の像担持体に対する位置および姿勢を規定することができ るので、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精 度良く取付けることができる。  According to the present invention, the blade member is attached to the surface portion of the blade support member that is predetermined to face the blade mounting portion, and protrudes from the surface portion of the blade support member to which the blade member is attached. A cleaning blade is manufactured by providing a spacer. Accordingly, the blade support member is provided with the blade member and the spacer on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge, and the spacer is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member to support the blade. A cleaning blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained. In such a cleaning blade, since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the spacer, the blade member is placed in a position suitable for cleaning by removing toner from the image carrier. It can be installed with high accuracy.
また本発明は、像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像し てトナー像を形成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置 に着脱可能に設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材 を像担持体に当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードの製 造方法であって、  The present invention is also detachable from an image forming apparatus for developing a latent image formed on an image carrier with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and transferring the toner image to a recording medium to form an image. A cleaning blade manufacturing method for cleaning an image carrier by attaching the blade member to the image carrier to be attached to a blade attachment portion of a cartridge provided in
板状部材にブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定める側に突出するように穿孔すること によって、突起部分が形成されたブレード支持部材を製造するステップと、 ブレード支持部材の突起部分が形成された側の表面部に、ブレード部材を貼付け るステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの製造方法である。  Perforating a plate-like member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion, and manufacturing a blade support member formed with a protruding portion; and a step of forming the protruding portion of the blade support member on the side where the protruding portion is formed And a step of affixing a blade member on the surface portion.
本発明に従えば、板状部材にブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定める側に突出する ように穿孔することによって、突起部分が形成されたブレード支持部材を製造し、ブレ ード支持部材の突起部分が形成された側の表面部にブレード部材を貼付けることに よってクリーニングブレードが製造される。これによつて、ブレード支持部材のカートリ ッジのブレード取付部に臨む側にブレード部材を備えるとともに突起部分を有し、突 起部分をブレード取付部とブレード支持部材との間に介在させることによってブレー ド支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持部材とブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なく ともいずれか一方を規定することのできるクリーニングブレードを得ることができる。こ のようなクリーニングブレードは、突起部分によってブレード部材の像担持体に対す る位置および姿勢を規定することができるので、ブレード部材を像担持体力 トナー を除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良く取付けることができる。 According to the present invention, a blade support member having a protrusion is formed by punching a plate-like member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. A cleaning blade is manufactured by sticking the blade member to the surface portion of the side of the support member on which the protruding portion is formed. As a result, the blade support member has a blade member on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge and has a protruding portion, and the protruding portion is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member. A cleaning blade that can define at least one of the attitude of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained. In such a cleaning blade, since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the protruding portion, the blade member is placed at a position suitable for cleaning by removing the image carrier force toner. Can be installed with high accuracy.
また本発明は、前記本発明のクリーニングブレードをカートリッジのブレード取付部 に取付けるクリーニングブレードの取付方法であって、  The present invention also provides a cleaning blade mounting method for mounting the cleaning blade of the present invention on a blade mounting portion of a cartridge.
ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼り付けられる側の表面と像担持体のブレード 部材が当接される表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブレード取付 部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード 部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード 取付部との間隔を規定する規定ステップと、  The angle formed between the surface of the blade member that is attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier on which the blade member abuts is a predetermined angle, and the reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted A defining step that regulates the attitude of the blade support member and the distance from the blade mounting portion so that the position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the blade is a predetermined position;
ブレード取付部とブレード支持部材との間に規定部材を介在させてクリーニングブ レードを取付ける取付ステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの取付 方法である。  And a mounting step of mounting the cleaning blade with a defining member interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade support member.
本発明に従えば、クリーニングブレードは、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼 付けられる側の表面と像担持体のブレード部材が当接される表面との成す角度が予 め定める角度になるとともに、ブレード取付部の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレー ド部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレー ド支持部材とブレード取付部との間隔が規定されてブレード取付部に取付けられる。 これによつて、ブレード支持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が貼付けられた 従来のクリーニングブレードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対する誤差の影 響を少なくすることができる。したがって、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを除去 して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良ぐまた容易に取付けることができる。 また本発明は、前記クリーニングブレードは、前記本発明のクリーニングブレードで あり、 According to the present invention, in the cleaning blade, the angle formed between the surface of the blade member that is attached to the blade support member and the surface that contacts the blade member of the image carrier is a predetermined angle, and the blade The blade support member posture and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion are regulated so that the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the mounting portion is a predetermined position. It is done. As a result, the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. Therefore, the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. In the present invention, the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention,
前記規定ステップは、  The defining step includes
ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面とブレード支持部材側の表面との成す角 度および厚みが異なる複数のスぺーサを準備するステップと、  Preparing a plurality of spacers having different angles and thicknesses between a surface to be attached to the blade mounting portion and a surface on the blade support member; and
前記複数のスぺーサから、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼付けられる側の 表面と像担持体の表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブレード取付 部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード 部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、スぺーサを選択するステップとを含むこ とを特徴とする。  The reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted while the angle formed by the surface of the blade member on the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle from the plurality of spacers. And a step of selecting a spacer so that the position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined position is a predetermined position.
本発明に従えば、規定ステップでは、ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面とブ レード支持部材側の表面との成す角度および厚みが異なる複数のスぺーサから、ブ レード部材のブレード支持部材に貼付けられる側の表面と像担持体の表面との成す 角度が予め定める角度になるととともに、ブレード取付部の基準面に垂直な方向に おけるブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置になるようにスぺーサを選択する。これ によって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持部材とブレード取付部との間 隔を容易に規定することができる。したがって、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを 除去して清掃するのに適した位置により容易に精度良く取付けることができる。 また本発明において、前記クリーニングブレードは、前記本発明のクリーニングブレ ードであり、  According to the present invention, in the defining step, the blade support member of the blade member is changed from a plurality of spacers having different angles and thicknesses between the surface attached to the blade attachment portion and the surface on the blade support member side. The spacer is formed so that the angle between the surface to be pasted and the surface of the image carrier becomes a predetermined angle, and the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion is a predetermined position. Select. Thus, the posture of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be easily defined. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. In the present invention, the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention,
前記規定ステップは、  The defining step includes
ブレード支持部材の突起部分の高さおよび突起部分の端面とブレード部材を支持 する表面部分を含む仮想平面との成す角度が異なる複数のクリーニングブレードを 準備するステップと、  Preparing a plurality of cleaning blades having different heights between the projecting portions of the blade support member and the angle between the end surface of the projecting portion and a virtual plane including a surface portion supporting the blade member;
前記複数のクリーニングブレードから、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼り付け られる側の表面と像担持体の表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブ レード取付部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけ るブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、クリーニングブレードを選択す るステップとを含むことを特徴とする。 The angle between the surface of the plurality of cleaning blades to be attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle, and a reference on which the blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted. Select the cleaning blade so that the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the surface is a predetermined position. Comprising the steps of:
本発明に従えば、規定ステップでは、ブレード支持部材の突起部分の高さおよび 突起部分の端面とブレード部材を支持する表面部分を含む仮想平面との成す角度 が異なる複数のクリーニングブレードから、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼付 けられる側の表面と像担持体の表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、 ブレード取付部の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード部材の位置が予め定める 位置になるように、クリーニングブレードを選択する。これによつて、クリーニングブレ ードをより容易にブレード取付部に取付けることができる。したがって、ブレード部材 を像担持体力 トナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置により容易に精度良く取 付けることができる。  According to the present invention, in the defining step, the blade member includes a plurality of cleaning blades having different heights of the projecting portions of the blade support member and different angles between the end surfaces of the projecting portions and the virtual plane including the surface portion supporting the blade member. The angle between the surface to be attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle, and the position of the blade member in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion is a predetermined position. So that the cleaning blade is selected. As a result, the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the image carrier strength toner and cleaning it.
また本発明において、前記クリーニングブレードは、前記本発明のクリーニングブレ ードであり、  In the present invention, the cleaning blade is the cleaning blade of the present invention,
規定ステップと取付ステップとの間に、  Between the specified step and the mounting step,
ブレード取付部の前記基準面に平行な方向であってブレード部材のブレード支持 部材に取付けられる側の端部力 像担持体に当接される側の端部に向力う方向にお けるブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、前記方向におけるブレード 支持部材の位置を平行位置規定手段によって規定するステップをさらに含むことを 特徴とする。  The blade member in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion and in the direction facing the end of the blade member that is in contact with the image bearing member. The method further includes the step of defining the position of the blade support member in the direction by the parallel position defining means so that the position of the position becomes a predetermined position.
本発明に従えば、クリーニングブレードは、ブレード取付部の基準面に平行な方向 であって、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側の端部から像担持体 に当接される側の端部に向力う方向におけるブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置 になるように、平行位置規定手段によってブレード支持部材の位置がさらに規定され る。これによつて、ブレード部材の取付精度をより一層向上させることができる。  According to the present invention, the cleaning blade is in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion, and the end portion of the blade member that is in contact with the image carrier from the end portion that is attached to the blade support member. The position of the blade support member is further defined by the parallel position defining means so that the position of the blade member in the direction to face is a predetermined position. Thereby, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
また本発明は、前記本発明のクリーニングブレードのカートリッジのブレード取付部 への取付位置を決定するクリーニングブレードの位置決め装置であって、  Further, the present invention is a cleaning blade positioning device for determining a mounting position of the cleaning blade of the present invention to a blade mounting portion of a cartridge,
ブレード取付部およびクリーニングブレードを保持する保持手段と、  Holding means for holding the blade mounting portion and the cleaning blade;
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードのブレード部材の第 1方向における位 置、およびクリーニングブレードの第 1方向における位置決めの基準となる第 1基準 位置を検出する第 1位置検出手段と、 Position of the cleaning blade blade member held by the holding means in the first direction and the first reference for positioning the cleaning blade in the first direction First position detecting means for detecting a position;
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードのブレード部材の第 1方向に略垂直な 第 2方向における位置、およびクリーニングブレードの第 2方向における位置決めの 基準となる第 2基準位置を検出する第 2位置検出手段と、  Second position detecting means for detecting a position of the cleaning blade held by the holding means in a second direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction and a second reference position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade in the second direction. When,
第 1位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 1方向における位置および 第 1基準位置、ならびに第 2位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 2方 向における位置および第 2基準位置を出力する出力手段と、  The position in the first direction and the first reference position of the blade member detected by the first position detection means, and the position in the second direction of the blade member and the second reference position detected by the second position detection means are output. Output means;
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードを移動させることによって、ブレード部 材の第 1方向における位置と第 1基準位置との間隔、およびブレード部材の第 2方向 における位置と第 2基準位置との間隔を調整する間隔調整手段とを備えることを特徴 とするクリーニングブレードの位置決め装置である。  By moving the cleaning blade held by the holding means, the distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position are set. A cleaning blade positioning device comprising: an interval adjusting means for adjusting.
本発明に従えば、保持手段によってブレード取付部およびクリーニングブレードが 保持され、第 1位置検出手段によってクリーニングブレードのブレード部材の第 1方 向における位置および第 1基準位置が検出され、第 2位置検出手段によってタリー- ングブレードのブレード部材の第 2方向における位置および第 2基準位置が検出さ れる。第 1位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 1方向における位置お よび第 1基準位置、ならびに第 2位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 2方向における位置および第 2基準位置は、出力手段によって出力される。これによ つて、たとえば操作者は、ブレード部材の第 1方向における位置と第 1基準位置との 間隔、およびブレード部材の第 2方向における位置と第 2基準位置との間隔を認識 することができる。ブレード部材の第 1方向における位置と第 1基準位置との間隔、お よびブレード部材の第 2方向における位置と第 2基準位置との間隔は、間隔調整手 段によってクリーニングブレードを移動させることによって調整される。これによつて、 たとえば操作者は、出力手段の出力結果に基づいてクリーニングブレードを間隔調 整手段によって移動させることによって、ブレード部材の第 1方向における位置と第 1 基準位置との間隔、およびブレード部材の第 2方向における位置と第 2基準位置との 間隔を調整することができる。したがって、ブレード部材が像担持体力もトナーを除去 して清掃するのに適した位置に配置されるように、クリーニングブレードを位置決めす ることができるので、ブレード部材を精度良く取付けることができる。 According to the present invention, the blade mounting portion and the cleaning blade are held by the holding means, the position of the blade member of the cleaning blade in the first direction and the first reference position are detected by the first position detecting means, and the second position detection is performed. By the means, the position of the blade member of the tally blade in the second direction and the second reference position are detected. The position in the first direction and the first reference position of the blade member detected by the first position detection means, and the position in the second direction and the second reference position of the blade member detected by the second position detection means are output. Output by means. Thus, for example, the operator can recognize the distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position. . The distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position are adjusted by moving the cleaning blade by the distance adjusting means. Is done. Accordingly, for example, the operator moves the cleaning blade by the interval adjusting unit based on the output result of the output unit, thereby the interval between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the blade. The distance between the position of the member in the second direction and the second reference position can be adjusted. Therefore, position the cleaning blade so that the blade member is positioned at a position suitable for removing the toner and cleaning the image carrier force. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with high accuracy.
また本発明は、画像形成装置に着脱可能に設けられるカートリッジであって、 像担持体と、  The present invention also provides a cartridge detachably provided in the image forming apparatus, the image carrier,
像担持体が収容されるハウジングと、  A housing that houses the image carrier;
ノ、ウジングのブレード取付部に取付けられる前記本発明のクリーニングブレードとを 備えることを特徴とするカートリッジである。  And a cleaning blade according to the present invention attached to a blade attaching portion of the Uzing.
本発明に従えば、カートリッジは、像担持体と、像担持体が収容されるハウジングと 、ハウジングのブレード取付部に取付けられる前記本発明のクリーニングブレードとを 備える。本発明のクリーニングブレードは、規定部材がブレード取付部とブレード支 持部材との間に介在されることによって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード取 付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を規定する。これによつて、ブレード支 持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が貼付けられた従来のクリーニングブレ ードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対する誤差の影響を少なくすることができ るので、ブレード部材が像担持体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精 度良く取付けられたカートリッジを得ることができる。  According to the present invention, the cartridge includes an image carrier, a housing that houses the image carrier, and the cleaning blade of the present invention that is attached to a blade attachment portion of the housing. In the cleaning blade of the present invention, the regulating member is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member, thereby defining at least one of the posture of the blade supporting member and the distance from the blade mounting portion. To do. As a result, the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced compared to the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade supporting member. A cartridge can be obtained in which the blade member is accurately mounted at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
図面の簡単な説明 Brief Description of Drawings
本発明の目的、特色、および利点は、下記の詳細な説明と図面とからより明確にな るであろう。  Objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent from the following detailed description and drawings.
図 1は、本発明の実施の第 1形態であるクリーニングブレード 1の構成を簡略ィ匕して 示す断面図である。  FIG. 1 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a cleaning blade 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
図 2は、図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の側面図である。  FIG. 2 is a side view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG.
図 3Aは図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の正面図であり、図 3Bは図 1に示すタリ 一二ングブレード 1の背面図であり、図 3Cは図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の平面 図である。  3A is a front view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 3B is a rear view of the tarting blade 1 shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 3C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. .
図 4は、本発明の実施の第 2形態であるカートリッジ 10の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す断 面図である。  FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
図 5は、取付側表面がホルダ側表面に対して傾斜するスぺーサ 31の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す断面図である。 図 6は、本発明の実施の第 3形態である位置決め装置 40の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す 概略図である。 FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a positioning device 40 according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
図 7は、位置決め装置 40に備わる取付調整部 41の構成を示す側面図である。 図 8は、取付調整部 41の構成を示す正面図である。  FIG. 7 is a side view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41 provided in the positioning device 40. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is a front view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41.
図 9は、取付調整部 41の構成を示す平面図である。  FIG. 9 is a plan view showing the configuration of the attachment adjusting portion 41. As shown in FIG.
図 10は、図 7に示す位置決め装置 40に備わる原器 45の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す正 面図である。  FIG. 10 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the original device 45 provided in the positioning device 40 shown in FIG.
図 11は、図 7に示す原器 45の第 1ナイフ 81および第 2ナイフ 82の部分を拡大して 示す拡大側面図である。  FIG. 11 is an enlarged side view showing an enlarged portion of the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 of the prototype 45 shown in FIG.
図 12は、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるクリーニングブレード 1 の位置を調整する様子を模式的に示す図である。  FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing how the position of the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. FIG.
図 13は、本発明の実施の第 4形態であるクリーニングブレード 1の取付方法の手順 を示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a method for attaching the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
図 14は、本発明の実施の第 5形態であるクリーニングブレード 100の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す正面図である。  FIG. 14 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
図 15は、本発明の実施の第 6形態であるクリーニングブレード 110の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す断面図である。  FIG. 15 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 110 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
図 16は、図 15に示すクリーニングブレード 110の側面図である。  FIG. 16 is a side view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG.
図 17Aは図 15に示すクリーニングブレード 110の正面図であり、図 17Bは図 15に 示すクリーニングブレード 110の背面図であり、図 17Cは図 15に示すクリーニングブ レード 110の平面図である。  17A is a front view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 17B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. 17C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG.
図 18は、本発明の実施の第 7形態であるカートリッジ 116の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す 断面図である。  FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 116 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
図 19は、ブレードホルダ 112のブレード部材 2を支持する表面部分を含む仮想平 面に対して傾斜する突起部分 118の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す断面図である。  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the protruding portion 118 that is inclined with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112.
図 20は、本発明の実施の第 8形態であるクリーニングブレード 120の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す断面図である。  FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 120 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
図 21は、評価 2におけるブレード部材 2の観察部分を示す斜視図である。 図 22Aおよび図 22Bは、印字試験後における実施例 3および比較例 2のブレード 部材 2の状態を模式的に示す図である。 FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing an observation part of the blade member 2 in evaluation 2. FIG. 22A and 22B are diagrams schematically showing the state of the blade member 2 of Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 after the printing test.
図 23Aおよび図 23Bは、実施例 3および比較例 2のブレード部材 2の感光体ドラム への接触部分を示す斜視図である。  FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are perspective views showing a contact portion of the blade member 2 of Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 with the photosensitive drum.
図 24は、金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130の構成を簡略化して示す 断面図である。  FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view showing a simplified configuration of a mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130.
図 25は、従来技術によるクリーニングブレード 140の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す断面図 である。  FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 140 according to the prior art.
発明を実施するための最良の形態 BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
以下図面を参考にして本発明の好適な実施例を詳細に説明する。  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
図 1は、本発明の実施の第 1形態であるクリーニングブレード 1の構成を簡略ィ匕して 示す断面図である。図 2は、図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の側面図である。図 3A は図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の正面図であり、図 3Bは図 1に示すクリーニング ブレード 1の背面図であり、図 3Cは図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1の平面図である FIG. 1 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a cleaning blade 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a side view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 3A is a front view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 3B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 3C is a plan view of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG.
。図 1は、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向に垂直な仮想平面であって、図 3Aに示 すクリーニングブレード 1の切断面線 I Iを含む仮想平面における断面図に相当す る。図 2は、クリーニングブレード 1の右側面図に相当する。図 1、図 2および図 3A〜 図 3Cでは、理解を容易にするために、一部分の厚みを省略して示す。本実施形態 のクリーニングブレード 1は、体積平均粒径がたとえば 10 m以下程度と小さい小粒 径トナーが用いられる場合に特に好適である。 . FIG. 1 is a virtual plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the virtual plane including the cutting plane line I I of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 3A. FIG. 2 corresponds to a right side view of the cleaning blade 1. In FIG. 1, FIG. 2 and FIGS. 3A to 3C, a part of the thickness is omitted for easy understanding. The cleaning blade 1 of the present embodiment is particularly suitable when a small particle size toner having a volume average particle size of about 10 m or less is used.
クリーニングブレード 1は、大略的に、ブレード部材 2と、ブレード部材 2を支持する ブレード支持部材であるブレードホルダ 3と、規定部材であるスぺーサ 4とを含んで構 成される。  The cleaning blade 1 generally includes a blade member 2, a blade holder 3 that is a blade support member that supports the blade member 2, and a spacer 4 that is a defining member.
ブレード部材 2は、帯状の平板形状であり、厚み方向に垂直な仮想平面における 断面形状が長方形状である。後述する図 4に示すカートリッジ 10においてブレード部 材 2は、長手方向が像担持体である円柱状の感光体ドラム 11の軸線方向に平行に なるように配置される。ブレード部材 2は、たとえば、熱硬化型ポリウレタンなどのウレ タンゴムまたはシリコーンゴムなどの弾性材料で形成される。ブレード部材 2は、たと えば接着剤によってブレードホルダ 3に貼付けられる。接着剤としては、ポリウレタン( 略称 PUR)系接着剤、エチレン 酢酸ビュル共重合体 (略称 EVA)系接着剤、ポリ アミド(略称 PA)系接着剤などのホットメルト接着剤などが挙げられる。これらの中でも 、 PUR系接着剤が好ましい。 The blade member 2 has a belt-like flat plate shape, and has a rectangular cross-sectional shape in a virtual plane perpendicular to the thickness direction. In a cartridge 10 shown in FIG. 4 to be described later, the blade member 2 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is parallel to the axial direction of a cylindrical photosensitive drum 11 that is an image carrier. The blade member 2 is formed of an elastic material such as urethane rubber such as thermosetting polyurethane or silicone rubber, for example. Blade member 2 For example, it is affixed to the blade holder 3 with an adhesive. Examples of adhesives include hot melt adhesives such as polyurethane (abbreviated PUR) adhesives, ethylene acetate butyl copolymer (abbreviated EVA) adhesives, and polyamide (abbreviated PA) adhesives. Among these, PUR adhesive is preferable.
本実施形態においてブレード部材 2は、後述する図 4に示すように、ブレードホルダ 3を基準として感光体ドラム 11と反対側に設けられ、ブレードホルダ 3よりも感光体ドラ ム 11の回転方向上流側に配置される。このように配置される場合、ブレード部材 2は 、ブレードホルダ 3を基準として感光体ドラム 11と同じ側に設けられ、ブレードホルダ 3よりも感光体ドラム 11の回転方向下流側に配置される場合に比べ、感光体ドラム 1 1との当接によってブレードホルダ 3から剥離しやすい。したがってブレード部材 2とブ レードホルダ 3との接着力を高める必要がある。前述のように接着剤として PUR系接 着剤を用いることによって、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3からの剥離を抑え、タリ 一二ングブレード 1の耐久性を向上させることができる。  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 described later, the blade member 2 is provided on the opposite side of the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3, and is upstream of the rotational direction of the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3. Placed in. When arranged in this way, the blade member 2 is provided on the same side as the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3 and is arranged downstream of the blade holder 3 in the rotation direction of the photosensitive drum 11. Compared with the photosensitive drum 11, the blade holder 3 is easily peeled off. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the adhesive force between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3. As described above, by using the PUR adhesive as the adhesive, it is possible to suppress the peeling of the blade member 2 from the blade holder 3 and to improve the durability of the taring blade 1.
またブレードホルダ 3のブレード部材 2が貼付けられる側の表面部は、プライマ処理 されていることが好ましい。プライマ処理を施すことによって、ブレードホルダ 3と接着 剤との接着力を向上させることができるので、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3から の剥離をより確実に抑えることができる。ブレードホルダ 3のプライマ処理は、たとえば ブレードホルダ 3のブレード部材 2が貼付けられる側の表面部にプライマを塗布する ことによって行なわれる。プライマの塗布方法としては、たとえば、プライマが貯留され たタンクにブレードホルダ 3を浸漬してプライマを塗布するデイツビングなどが挙げら れる。プライマはデイツビングに限定されず、たとえば刷毛またはスプレイなどによつ てブレードホルダ 3に塗布されてもよい。プライマとしては、たとえばフエノール系プラ イマおよびシランカップリング剤系プライマなどが挙げられる。  Further, the surface portion of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached is preferably subjected to a primer treatment. By performing the primer treatment, it is possible to improve the adhesive force between the blade holder 3 and the adhesive, so that the peeling of the blade member 2 from the blade holder 3 can be more reliably suppressed. The primer treatment of the blade holder 3 is performed, for example, by applying a primer to the surface portion of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached. Examples of the primer application method include dating for immersing the blade holder 3 in a tank in which the primer is stored and applying the primer. The primer is not limited to datebing, and may be applied to the blade holder 3 by, for example, a brush or a spray. Examples of the primer include a phenol-based primer and a silane coupling agent-based primer.
ブレードホルダ 3は、平板形状である。ブレードホルダ 3は、ブレード部材 2の長手 方向に延びて設けられ、厚み方向一方側の表面部にブレード部材 2を支持する。ブ レードホルダ 3の長手方向における両端部寄りの部分には、カートリッジ 10のブレー ド取付部 29にねじ止めするための後述する取付用ねじ 30が挿通されるホルダ側ね じ孔 3aが形成されている。ブレードホルダ 3は、短手方向におけるブレード部材 2を 支持する側と反対側の端部が屈曲され、屈曲部 7を形成している。屈曲部 7は、カー トリッジ 10のハウジング 15の形状に対応するように形成される。本実施形態では、屈 曲部 7は略 90° に屈曲して形成されており、ブレードホルダ 3は L字形状である。ブ レードホルダ 3は、たとえば、表面処理鋼板、ステンレス鋼板、鉄板または銅板などの 剛性材料力もなる板によって実現される。 The blade holder 3 has a flat plate shape. The blade holder 3 is provided so as to extend in the longitudinal direction of the blade member 2, and supports the blade member 2 on a surface portion on one side in the thickness direction. A holder side screw hole 3a through which a mounting screw 30 (to be described later) for screwing to the blade mounting portion 29 of the cartridge 10 is inserted is formed in a portion near both ends in the longitudinal direction of the blade holder 3. . The blade holder 3 holds the blade member 2 in the short direction. The end opposite to the supporting side is bent to form a bent portion 7. The bent portion 7 is formed so as to correspond to the shape of the housing 15 of the cartridge 10. In the present embodiment, the bent portion 7 is formed to be bent at approximately 90 °, and the blade holder 3 is L-shaped. The blade holder 3 is realized by a plate having a rigid material force such as a surface-treated steel plate, a stainless steel plate, an iron plate, or a copper plate.
本実施形態では、ブレードホルダ 3の長手方向両端部は切欠かれ、切欠き部 8が 形成されている。切欠き部 8aは、後述するスぺーサ 4の係合部 9が係合される第 1切 欠き部 8aと、ブレードホルダ 3の短手方向におけるブレード部材 2が貼付けられる側 と反対側の端部に形成される第 2切欠き部 8bとを含む。第 1切欠き部 8aおよび第 2切 欠き部 8bは、カートリッジ 10のハウジング 15に設けられる位置決め用の突起部分の 形状に対応するように、ブレードホルダ 3の短手方向に延びて形成される。より詳細 には、第 1切欠き部 8aおよび第 2切欠き部 8bは、それぞれブレードホルダ 3の短手方 向における幅寸法である切欠き幅力 ハウジング 15に設けられる位置決め用の突起 部分の幅寸法よりも大きく形成される。第 1切欠き部 8aおよび第 2切欠き部 8bは、ブ レードホルダ 3の長手方向への移動を防止し、短手方向への移動を許容する。ハウ ジング 15に設けられる位置決め用の突起部分は、第 1切欠き部 8aおよび第 2切欠き 部 8bに揷通される。  In the present embodiment, both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the blade holder 3 are notched, and notched portions 8 are formed. The notch portion 8a includes a first notch portion 8a to be engaged with an engaging portion 9 of a spacer 4 to be described later, and an end opposite to the side on which the blade member 2 is pasted in the short direction of the blade holder 3. And a second notch portion 8b formed in the portion. The first notch 8a and the second notch 8b are formed to extend in the short direction of the blade holder 3 so as to correspond to the shape of the positioning projection provided on the housing 15 of the cartridge 10. More specifically, the first notch 8a and the second notch 8b are each a notch width force, which is a width dimension in the short direction of the blade holder 3, and the width of the positioning projection provided on the housing 15. It is formed larger than the dimension. The first notch portion 8a and the second notch portion 8b prevent the blade holder 3 from moving in the longitudinal direction and allow movement in the short direction. The positioning projection provided on the housing 15 is passed through the first notch 8a and the second notch 8b.
ブレードホルダ 3を短手方向に移動させ、ブレードホルダ 3を短手方向であるブレー ド取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向における位置を調整して固定することによって、 ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード部材 2のブレードエッジ 部 2aの位置を調整し、ブレード部材 2の感光体ドラム 11に対する進入量を調整する ことができる。これによつて、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレ ードエッジ部 2aの位置をより容易に調整することができる。このようにして、第 1切欠き 部 8aおよび第 2切欠き部 8は、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向であって、 ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3に取付けられる側の端部から感光体ドラム 11に当 接される側の端部に向力う方向、すなわちブレードホルダ 3の短手方向における位置 を規定する。第 1切欠き部 8aおよび第 2切欠き部 8bは平行位置規定手段を構成する スぺーサ 4は、ブレードホルダ 3の厚み方向一方側の表面部に設けられる。より詳細 には、スぺーサ 4は、ブレードホルダ 3の長手方向両端部に設けられる。スぺーサ 4は 、平板形状である。本実施形態では、スぺーサ 4は一様な厚みに形成され、ブレード 取付部 29に取付けられる側の表面とブレードホルダ 3に支持される側の表面とは平 行になっている。スぺーサ 4の厚み寸法は、たとえば 2mmである。スぺーサ 4には、 ホルダ側ねじ孔 3aに連通するように、ブレード取付部 29にねじ止めするためのねじ が挿通されるスぺーサ側ねじ孔 4aが形成されている。 The blade holder 3 is moved in the short direction, and the blade holder 3 is adjusted and fixed in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29, which is the short direction, so that the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is fixed. By adjusting the position of the blade edge 2a of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the blade member 2, the amount of the blade member 2 entering the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted. Thereby, the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted more easily. Thus, the first notch 8a and the second notch 8 are in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade attachment 29 and from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 3. A direction in the direction toward the end on the side in contact with the photosensitive drum 11, that is, a position in the short direction of the blade holder 3 is defined. The first notch 8a and the second notch 8b constitute a parallel position defining means. The spacer 4 is provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3. More specifically, the spacers 4 are provided at both longitudinal ends of the blade holder 3. The spacer 4 has a flat plate shape. In the present embodiment, the spacer 4 is formed to have a uniform thickness, and the surface on the side attached to the blade attachment portion 29 and the surface on the side supported by the blade holder 3 are parallel. The thickness dimension of the spacer 4 is, for example, 2 mm. The spacer 4 is formed with a spacer-side screw hole 4a through which a screw for screwing to the blade mounting portion 29 is inserted so as to communicate with the holder-side screw hole 3a.
スぺーサ 4は、ブレードホルダ 3の切欠き部 8に対応するように切り欠かれている。ス ぺーサ 4は、ブレードホルダ 3の第 1切欠き部 8aに係合されるように、ブレードホルダ 3に支持される側に突出する一対の係合部 9を有する。係合部 9は、長尺部 9aを遊 端部に有し、厚み方向に垂直な方向における幅寸法が長尺部 9aよりも短 、段差部 9 bを基端部に有する。段差部 9bの長さ寸法は、ブレードホルダ 3の厚み寸法よりもわ ずかに大きい。たとえば、ブレードホルダ 3の厚み寸法が 1. 2mm程度である場合、 段差部 9bの長さ寸法は 1. 25mm程度である。  The spacer 4 is notched so as to correspond to the notch 8 of the blade holder 3. The spacer 4 has a pair of engaging portions 9 protruding to the side supported by the blade holder 3 so as to be engaged with the first notch portion 8a of the blade holder 3. The engaging portion 9 has a long portion 9a at the free end portion, a width dimension in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction is shorter than the long portion 9a, and a step portion 9b at the base end portion. The length dimension of the step 9b is slightly larger than the thickness dimension of the blade holder 3. For example, when the thickness dimension of the blade holder 3 is about 1.2 mm, the length dimension of the stepped portion 9b is about 1.25 mm.
一対の段差部 9bは、ブレードホルダ 3の第 1切欠き部 8aに接する表面間の距離が 、ブレードホルダ 3の短手方向における第 1切欠き部 8aの切欠き幅に略等しくなるよう に形成される。一対の長尺部 9aは、段差部 9bの第 1切欠き部 8aに接する表面に連 なる表面間の距離が、第 1切欠き部 8aの前記切欠き幅よりも大きくなるように形成さ れる。スぺーサ 4は、係合部 9がブレードホルダ 3の第 1切欠き部 8aに挿通され、長尺 部 9aがブレードホルダ 3の厚み方向他方側に突出して係合されることによってブレー ドホルダ 3に固定される。  The pair of stepped portions 9b are formed such that the distance between the surfaces in contact with the first notch 8a of the blade holder 3 is substantially equal to the notch width of the first notch 8a in the short direction of the blade holder 3. Is done. The pair of long portions 9a is formed such that the distance between the surfaces connected to the surface of the step portion 9b that contacts the first notch portion 8a is larger than the notch width of the first notch portion 8a. . In the spacer 4, the engaging portion 9 is inserted into the first notch portion 8 a of the blade holder 3, and the long portion 9 a protrudes to the other side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3 and engages with the blade holder 3. Fixed to.
スぺーサ 4は、後述する取付用ねじ 30でブレード取付部 29にねじ止めしたときに 変形しな 、程度の弾性を有する材料で形成される。スぺーサ 4を形成する材料として は、たとえばアクリロニトリル ブタジエン スチレン榭脂(Acrylonitrile- butadiene- st yrene ;略称 ABS)およびポリスチレン榭脂などの榭脂、ならびに表面処理鋼板、アル ミニゥム板もしくはステンレス鋼板などの金属板などが挙げられる。たとえば榭脂で形 成される場合、スぺーサ 4は、射出成形などによって形成することができる。また金属 板によって形成される場合、スぺーサ 4は、たとえば打抜き加工などによって形成す ることがでさる。 The spacer 4 is formed of a material having a degree of elasticity that is not deformed when screwed to the blade mounting portion 29 with a mounting screw 30 described later. Examples of the material for forming the spacer 4 include acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (abbreviated as ABS) and polystyrene resin, as well as surface-treated steel sheets, aluminum sheets, and stainless steel sheets. A metal plate etc. are mentioned. For example, in the case of forming with a resin, the spacer 4 can be formed by injection molding or the like. In addition, when formed of a metal plate, the spacer 4 is formed by punching, for example. It can be done.
クリーニングブレード 1は、たとえば、ブレードホルダ 3のブレード取付部 29に臨む ベく予め定められる側の表面部に、ブレード部材 2を貼付けた後、ブレードホルダ 3の ブレード部材 2が貼付けられた側の表面部に、突出するようにスぺーサ 4を設けること によって製造される。  For example, after the blade member 2 is pasted on the surface portion of the blade holder 3 facing the blade mounting portion 29 on the predetermined side, the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is pasted. Manufactured by providing spacers 4 so as to protrude from the section.
図 4は、本発明の実施の第 2形態であるカートリッジ 10の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す断 面図である。図 4では、理解を容易にするために、トナーを拡大して示す。カートリツ ジ 10は、像担持体である感光体ドラム 11と、前述のクリーニングブレード 1を含むタリ 一二ング装置 12と、感光体ドラム 11を帯電させる帯電手段である帯電装置 13と、感 光体ドラム 11に形成される静電潜像を現像する現像手段である現像装置 14と、感光 体ドラム 11、クリーニング装置 12、帯電装置 13および現像装置 14を収容するハウジ ング 15とを含んで構成される。クリーニング装置 12、帯電装置 13および現像装置 14 は、この順に感光体ドラム 11の回転方向上流側から下流側に向力つて配置される。 本実施形態においてカートリッジ 10は、繰返し画像形成に使用された後に、感光体 ドラムおよびクリーニングブレードなどの劣化した部品が取外されてハウジング 15が 洗浄され、洗浄されたハウジング 15に、新しい感光体ドラム 11およびクリーニングブ レード 1などの各部品が取付けられたカートリッジである。より詳細には、本実施形態 のカートリッジ 10は、前述の図 24に示す金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130力 実施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1に交換されたカートリッジである。 感光体ドラム 11は、円柱形状である。感光体ドラム 11は、たとえば円柱状の導電性 支持体の外周面部に光導電性材料を結着剤で結着してなる感光層を設けることによ つて形成される。本実施形態において感光体ドラム 11は、軸部材 l ibを介して軸線 1 laまわりに回転可能にハウジング 15に支持され、矢符 16で示される時計まわり方向 に回転駆動される。  FIG. 4 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 10 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In Figure 4, the toner is shown enlarged for ease of understanding. The cartridge 10 includes a photosensitive drum 11 that is an image carrier, a taring device 12 that includes the cleaning blade 1 described above, a charging device 13 that is a charging unit that charges the photosensitive drum 11, and a photosensitive member. The developing device 14 is a developing unit that develops an electrostatic latent image formed on the drum 11, and includes a photosensitive drum 11, a cleaning device 12, a charging device 13, and a housing 15 that houses the developing device 14. The The cleaning device 12, the charging device 13, and the developing device 14 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side in the rotation direction of the photosensitive drum 11. In this embodiment, the cartridge 10 is repeatedly used for image formation, and then the deteriorated parts such as the photosensitive drum and the cleaning blade are removed to clean the housing 15, and the cleaned housing 15 is replaced with a new photosensitive drum. 11 and cleaning blade 1 etc. are installed cartridges. More specifically, the cartridge 10 of this embodiment is a cartridge replaced with the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment in which the mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130 shown in FIG. 24 is used. The photosensitive drum 11 has a cylindrical shape. The photosensitive drum 11 is formed, for example, by providing a photosensitive layer formed by binding a photoconductive material with a binder on the outer peripheral surface portion of a cylindrical conductive support. In this embodiment, the photosensitive drum 11 is supported by the housing 15 so as to be rotatable about the axis 1 la via the shaft member l ib and is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction indicated by the arrow 16.
カートリッジ 10は、画像形成装置に装着されていない状態において感光体ドラム 1 1を覆い、保護するドラムシャツタ 17をさらに備える。ドラムシャツタ 17は、カートリッジ 10が画像形成装置に装着されている状態では図 4に示すように感光体ドラム 11を露 出させ、カートリッジ 10が画像形成装置に装着されていない状態では感光体ドラム 1 1を覆うように、角変位駆動される。 The cartridge 10 further includes a drum shirt 17 that covers and protects the photosensitive drum 11 when the cartridge 10 is not attached to the image forming apparatus. The drum shirt 17 exposes the photosensitive drum 11 as shown in FIG. 4 when the cartridge 10 is mounted on the image forming apparatus, and the photosensitive drum 11 when the cartridge 10 is not mounted on the image forming apparatus. 1 Angular displacement drive is performed to cover 1.
帯電装置 13は、本実施形態では帯電ローラ 13であり、感光体ドラム 11に接触した 状態で感光体ドラム 11を帯電させる。帯電ローラ 13は、円柱形状であり、軸線まわり に回転可能に支持され、矢符 18で示される反時計まわり方向に回転駆動される。 現像装置 14は、本実施形態ではトナーから成る 1成分現像剤によって静電潜像を 現像する。現像装置 14は、トナーを収容する収容容器であるトナーホッパ 19と、トナ 一ホッパ 19に収容されるトナーを撹拌する撹拌手段であるアジテータ 20と、感光体ド ラム 11に 1成分現像剤であるトナーを供給する現像ローラ 21と、現像ローラ 21にトナ 一を搬送するトナー搬送ローラ 22とを含んで構成される。現像ローラ 21は、円柱形 状であり、軸線まわりに回転可能に支持され、矢符 23で示される反時計回り方向に 回転駆動される。現像ローラ 21は、感光体ドラム 11に当接するように配置される。ま た現像装置 14は、現像ローラ 21に当接するように設けられ、感光体ドラム 11へのト ナ一の搬送量を規制する規制ブレード 24を備える。規制ブレード 24は支持板 25を 介してハウジング 15に支持される。またハウジング 15の開口部には、現像ローラ 21と の隙間からのトナーの漏れを防止するためのシールブレード 26が設けられている。 クリーニング装置 12は、前述のクリーニングブレード 1と、クリーニングブレード 1によ つて感光体ドラム 11から除去されたトナーを収容する収容容器である廃棄トナーボッ タス 27とを含む。ハウジング 15の開口部には、廃棄トナーボックス 27に回収されたト ナ一の感光体ドラム 11への再付着を防止するためのリカバリーブレード 28が設けら れている。クリーニングブレード 1は、ハウジング 15に設けられるブレード取付部 29に 、ビスねじなどの取付用ねじ 30によって固定される。ブレード取付部 29は、ハウジン グ 15から着脱可能に構成される。  The charging device 13 is a charging roller 13 in the present embodiment, and charges the photosensitive drum 11 while being in contact with the photosensitive drum 11. The charging roller 13 has a cylindrical shape, is rotatably supported around an axis, and is driven to rotate in the counterclockwise direction indicated by an arrow 18. In the present embodiment, the developing device 14 develops the electrostatic latent image with a one-component developer made of toner. The developing device 14 includes a toner hopper 19 that is a container for storing toner, an agitator 20 that is a stirring means for stirring the toner stored in the toner hopper 19, and a toner that is a one-component developer in the photosensitive drum 11. A developing roller 21 for supplying toner, and a toner conveying roller 22 for conveying toner to the developing roller 21. The developing roller 21 has a cylindrical shape, is rotatably supported around the axis, and is driven to rotate in a counterclockwise direction indicated by an arrow 23. The developing roller 21 is disposed so as to contact the photosensitive drum 11. The developing device 14 includes a regulating blade 24 that is provided so as to contact the developing roller 21 and regulates the amount of toner transported to the photosensitive drum 11. The regulating blade 24 is supported by the housing 15 via the support plate 25. A seal blade 26 is provided at the opening of the housing 15 to prevent toner leakage from the gap with the developing roller 21. The cleaning device 12 includes the cleaning blade 1 described above and a waste toner button 27 that is a storage container for storing toner removed from the photosensitive drum 11 by the cleaning blade 1. A recovery blade 28 for preventing the toner collected in the waste toner box 27 from reattaching to the photosensitive drum 11 is provided at the opening of the housing 15. The cleaning blade 1 is fixed to a blade mounting portion 29 provided in the housing 15 by mounting screws 30 such as screw screws. The blade mounting portion 29 is configured to be detachable from the housing 15.
クリーニングブレード 1の短手方向一端部であるブレードホルダ 3の屈曲部 7とハウ ジング 15との間には、クッション部材 32が介在される。これによつてクリーニングブレ ード 1は、ブレード取付部 29の後述する基準面に平行な方向への移動が許容される 。クッション部材 32は、たとえばポリウレタンフォームなどによって形成される。ブレー ド部材 2は、ブレードホルダ 3を基準として、感光体ドラム 11と反対側に設けられる。 ブレード部材 2は、ブレードホルダ 3に支持されて 、な 、遊端部の感光体ドラム 11に 近い側の端部であるエッジ部(以後、ブレードエッジ部とも称する) 2aが、感光体ドラ ム 11の外周面部に弹発的に当接される。 A cushion member 32 is interposed between the bent portion 7 of the blade holder 3 which is one end portion in the short direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the housing 15. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 is allowed to move in a direction parallel to a reference surface, which will be described later, of the blade mounting portion 29. The cushion member 32 is formed of, for example, polyurethane foam. The blade member 2 is provided on the side opposite to the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3. The blade member 2 is supported by the blade holder 3, and is attached to the photosensitive drum 11 at the free end. An edge portion (hereinafter also referred to as a blade edge portion) 2a that is an end portion on the near side is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11 spontaneously.
クリーニング装置 12は、クリーニングブレード 1のブレード部材 2を感光体ドラム 11 に当接させることによって、図示しない転写装置によるトナー像の記録媒体への転写 後に感光体ドラム 11に残留するトナーを除去し、廃棄トナーボックス 27に回収する。 これによつて感光体ドラム 11が清掃され、繰返し使用可能な状態になる。感光体ドラ ム 11は、矢符 16方向の回転駆動に伴ってクリーニングブレード 1によって繰返し清 掃され、これによつて繰返し連続的に使用が可能になる。  The cleaning device 12 removes the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum 11 after the toner image is transferred to the recording medium by a transfer device (not shown) by bringing the blade member 2 of the cleaning blade 1 into contact with the photosensitive drum 11. Collect in waste toner box 27. As a result, the photosensitive drum 11 is cleaned and can be used repeatedly. The photosensitive drum 11 is repeatedly cleaned by the cleaning blade 1 as it is driven to rotate in the direction of the arrow 16, so that it can be used repeatedly and continuously.
クリーニングブレード 1は、感光体ドラム 11のハウジング 15への取付けに先立って ハウジング 15に取付けられる。クリーニングブレード 1を取付けるときには、感光体ドラ ム 11が取付けられたときに、ブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aが感光体ドラム 11の外周 面部の予め定める位置 90に当接し、かつブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3に支持さ れる側の表面と感光体ドラム 11のエッジ部 2aが当接する位置 90における接線 90aと の成す角度 (以後、ブレード部材と感光体ドラムとの当接角と称する) Θ 1が予め定め る角度になるように、ブレード部材 2の位置および姿勢が調整される。  The cleaning blade 1 is attached to the housing 15 prior to the attachment of the photosensitive drum 11 to the housing 15. When the cleaning blade 1 is attached, when the photosensitive drum 11 is attached, the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 contacts the predetermined position 90 of the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11, and the blade holder of the blade member 2 The angle formed between the surface supported by 3 and the tangent 90a at the position 90 where the edge 2a of the photosensitive drum 11 abuts (hereinafter referred to as the abutting angle between the blade member and the photosensitive drum). The position and posture of the blade member 2 are adjusted so that the angle is determined.
クリーニングブレード 1は、スぺーサ 4がブレード取付部 29に接するように取付けら れる。これによつてスぺーサ 4力 ブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在 される。ブレード取付部 29は、交換前に取付けられていた前述の図 24に示す金型 一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130が、取付用ねじ 30によるねじ止めによつ て適切な位置および姿勢に配置されるように形成されて 、る。スぺーサ 4がブレード 取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在されない場合、ブレードホルダ 3がブレー ド取付部 29に接するように取付けられるので、ブレード部材 2は、スぺーサ 4が介在さ れる場合に比べて、感光体ドラム 11から遠ざ力ることになる。この状態では、ブレード 部材 2が感光体ドラム 11に当接することができず、感光体ドラム 11からトナーを除去 することができない。  The cleaning blade 1 is mounted so that the spacer 4 is in contact with the blade mounting portion 29. Thus, the spacer 4 force is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. The blade mounting portion 29 is placed in an appropriate position and posture by screwing the mounting blade 30 with the cleaning blade 130 of the mold integrated molding type shown in FIG. It is formed as follows. If the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, the blade holder 3 is mounted so as to be in contact with the blade mounting portion 29, so that the blade member 2 has the spacer 4 interposed. As compared with the case where the photoconductor drum 11 is used, it is forced away from the photosensitive drum 11. In this state, the blade member 2 cannot come into contact with the photosensitive drum 11 and the toner cannot be removed from the photosensitive drum 11.
本実施形態では、スぺーサ 4がブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在 されるので、スぺーサ 4の厚みを調整することによって、ブレード取付部 29のタリー- ングブレード 1が取付けられるべき表面 (以後、基準面と称する)に垂直な方向におけ るブレード部材 2の位置を調整することができる。これによつて、スぺーサ 4がブレード 取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在されない場合に比べて、ブレード部材 2の エッジ部 2aを予め定める設定当接位置 90により容易に配置することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the spacer 4 is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, the tally blade 1 of the blade mounting portion 29 is adjusted by adjusting the thickness of the spacer 4. In a direction perpendicular to the surface to be mounted (hereinafter referred to as the reference plane) The position of the blade member 2 can be adjusted. Accordingly, the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 can be easily arranged at the predetermined set contact position 90, compared to the case where the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. Can do.
このときのブレード部材 2の感光体ドラム 11に対する姿勢は、ブレード部材 2と感光 体ドラム 11との当接角 θ 1で表される。当接角 θ 1は、スぺーサ 4のブレードホルダ 3 に支持される側の表面(以後、ホルダ側表面と称する)のブレード取付部 29に取付け られる側の表面 (以後、取付側表面)に対する傾斜角度 Θ 2によって調整することが できる。スぺーサ 4のホルダ側表面の取付側表面に対する傾斜角度 Θ 2は、当接角 θ 1がブレード部材 2によるトナーの除去に適した値として予め定められる設定当接 角度になるように選択される。設定当接角度は、感光体ドラム 11の外周面部を形成 する材料、ブレード部材 2の材料などによって異なるので、予め試験などによって求 められる。たとえば、当接角 Θ 1を変化させてクリーニングブレード 1を取付け、各当 接角 Θ 1でクリーニングブレード 1が取付けられたカートリッジ 10をそれぞれ画像形成 装置に搭載し、サンプル画像を記録用紙に連続的に形成させる実写試験を行なう。 この実写試験において形成された画像の品質、感光体ドラム 11の膜減り量および感 光体ドラム 11の外周面部への傷の発生の有無などに基づいてトナーの除去性能を 評価し、たとえば形成された画像に掃きむらなどの画像欠陥が少なぐまた感光体ド ラム 11の膜減り量が少なぐ感光体ドラム 11の外周面部への傷の発生が少ないとき の当接角 Θ 1を設定当接角度として求める。  The posture of the blade member 2 with respect to the photosensitive drum 11 at this time is represented by the contact angle θ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11. The contact angle θ 1 is relative to the surface of the spacer 4 on the side supported by the blade holder 3 (hereinafter referred to as the holder-side surface) and the surface attached to the blade mounting portion 29 (hereinafter referred to as the mounting-side surface). It can be adjusted by tilt angle Θ2. The inclination angle Θ 2 of the holder 4 surface of the spacer 4 with respect to the mounting side surface is selected so that the contact angle θ 1 becomes a preset contact angle that is predetermined as a value suitable for toner removal by the blade member 2. The The set contact angle varies depending on the material forming the outer peripheral surface portion of the photosensitive drum 11, the material of the blade member 2, and the like. For example, the cleaning blade 1 is mounted by changing the contact angle Θ1, and the cartridge 10 with the cleaning blade 1 mounted at each contact angle Θ1 is mounted on the image forming apparatus, and sample images are continuously printed on the recording paper. A live-action test is performed. The toner removal performance is evaluated based on the quality of the image formed in this live-action test, the amount of film reduction of the photosensitive drum 11 and the presence or absence of scratches on the outer peripheral surface of the photosensitive drum 11, and for example, Set contact angle Θ1 when there are few image defects such as sweeping unevenness in the image, and there is little film loss on photoconductor drum 11, and there is little scratch on the outer peripheral surface of photoconductor drum 11. Calculate as an angle.
本実施形態のスぺーサ 4は、一様な厚みに形成され、ホルダ側表面の取付側表面 に対する傾斜角度 Θ 2は略 0° である。このような一様な厚みのスぺーサ 4を介在さ せてクリーニングブレード 1を取付けたときに当接角 Θ 1が設定当接角度にならない 場合、一様な厚みのスぺーサ 4に代えて、図 5に示すように、取付側表面がホルダ側 表面に対して傾斜するスぺーサ 31を用いればょ 、。取付側表面がホルダ側表面に 対して傾斜するスぺーサ 31、より詳細には取付側表面が、ブレード部材 2に近づくに つれてブレードホルダ 3から離反またはブレードホルダ 3に近接するように形成される スぺーサを用いることによって、当接角 θ 1を容易に設定当接角度に調整することが できる。図 5では、取付側表面が、ブレード部材 2に近づくにつれてブレードホルダ 3 から離反するように形成されるスぺーサ 31を示す。 The spacer 4 of the present embodiment is formed to have a uniform thickness, and the inclination angle Θ 2 of the holder-side surface with respect to the attachment-side surface is approximately 0 °. If the contact angle Θ1 does not reach the set contact angle when the cleaning blade 1 is attached with the spacer 4 having such a uniform thickness, the spacer 4 is replaced with the spacer 4 having a uniform thickness. As shown in Fig. 5, use a spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface. Spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface, more specifically, the mounting side surface is formed so as to move away from blade holder 3 or approach blade holder 3 as blade member 2 is approached. By using the spacer, the contact angle θ 1 can be easily adjusted to the set contact angle. In FIG. 5, the blade holder 3 as the mounting surface approaches the blade member 2. A spacer 31 formed so as to be separated from is shown.
クリーニングブレード 1は、より詳細には、たとえば以下のようにして取付けられる。 厚みおよびホルダ側表面の取付側表面に対する傾斜角度 Θ 2が異なる複数のスぺ ーサ 4を準備する。これら複数のスぺーサ 4の中から、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に 垂直な方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置が予め定める位置になるとともに、当接角 θ 1が設定当接角度になるようにスぺーサ 4を選択する。本実施形態では、ブレード 部材 2のエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90に位置するときのブレード取付部 29の基準 面に垂直な方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置力 ブレード取付部 29の基準面に垂 直な方向におけるブレード部材 2の予め定める位置に相当する。次いで、選択された スぺーサ 4をブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在させてクリーニングブ レード 1をブレード取付部 29に取付ける。このように、ブレード取付部 29とブレードホ ルダ 3との間にスぺーサ 4を介在させることによって、スぺーサ 4がブレード取付部 29 とブレードホルダ 3との間に介在されな 、場合に比べて、ブレード部材 2を感光体ドラ ム 11からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置および姿勢により確実に配置す ることができる。したがって、クリーニングブレード 1を精度良く取付けることができる。 本実施形態においてクリーニングブレード 1は、平行位置規定手段である第 1切欠 き部 8aおよび第 2切欠き部 8bを有するので、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な 方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置を調整することができる。したがってクリーニング ブレード 1は、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード部材 2の 位置が予め定める位置になるように調整された後に、ブレード取付部 29に固定され る。本実施形態では、ブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90に位置すると きのブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置力 ブ レード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード部材 2の予め定める位置に 相当する。  More specifically, the cleaning blade 1 is attached as follows, for example. A plurality of spacers 4 having different thicknesses and inclination angles Θ 2 of the holder side surface with respect to the mounting side surface are prepared. Among the plurality of spacers 4, the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 becomes a predetermined position, and the contact angle θ 1 becomes the set contact angle. Select spacer 4. In the present embodiment, the positional force of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 when the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is positioned at the set contact position 90. This corresponds to a predetermined position of the blade member 2 in the straight direction. Next, the cleaning blade 1 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 with the selected spacer 4 interposed between the blade attachment portion 29 and the blade holder 3. In this way, by interposing the spacer 4 between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, the spacer 4 is not interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. Thus, the blade member 2 can be reliably disposed at a position and posture suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it. Therefore, the cleaning blade 1 can be attached with high accuracy. In the present embodiment, the cleaning blade 1 has the first notch portion 8a and the second notch portion 8b which are parallel position defining means, so that the position of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 is determined. Can be adjusted. Therefore, the cleaning blade 1 is fixed to the blade attachment portion 29 after being adjusted so that the position of the blade member 2 in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade attachment portion 29 is a predetermined position. In this embodiment, the position force of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 when the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is positioned at the set contact position 90 is applied to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. This corresponds to a predetermined position of the blade member 2 in the parallel direction.
以上のように本実施形態では、ブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間にはス ぺーサ 4が介在され、ブレードホルダ 3の姿勢およびブレードホルダ 3とブレード取付 部 29との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を規定するので、ブレード部材 2の感 光体ドラム 11に対する位置および姿勢を規定することができる。このとき、前述の図 2 5に示すクリーニングブレード 140のようにブレード支持部材 141に段差部 143を形 成する必要がないので、段差部 143の寸法誤差によってブレード部材 2の取付位置 が設定当接位置 90からずれることを防ぐことができる。またブレード部材 2は、ブレー ドホルダ 3のブレード取付部 29に臨む側の表面部に設けられるので、ブレードホルダ 3に平行度および厚み寸法の誤差が生じても、ブレード部材 2の取付位置には影響 しない。またブレード部材 2は、ブレードホルダ 3を基準にして感光体ドラム 11と反対 側になるようにブレード取付部 29に取付けられているので、ブレード部材 2の厚み寸 法に誤差が生じても、ブレード部材 2の取付位置には影響しない。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the spacer 4 is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3, and the position of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 are out of the range. Since at least one of them is defined, the position and posture of the blade member 2 with respect to the photosensitive drum 11 can be defined. At this time, Figure 2 above Since there is no need to form the stepped portion 143 on the blade support member 141 unlike the cleaning blade 140 shown in FIG. 5, the mounting position of the blade member 2 is prevented from deviating from the set contact position 90 due to the dimensional error of the stepped portion 143. be able to. Further, since the blade member 2 is provided on the surface portion of the blade holder 3 facing the blade mounting portion 29, even if parallelism and thickness dimension errors occur in the blade holder 3, the mounting position of the blade member 2 is not affected. do not do. Further, since the blade member 2 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 so as to be opposite to the photosensitive drum 11 with respect to the blade holder 3, even if an error occurs in the thickness dimension of the blade member 2, the blade member 2 The mounting position of member 2 is not affected.
このように本実施形態では、前述の図 25に示すようにブレード支持部材 141に形 成された段差部 143にブレード部材 142が貼付けられた従来のクリーニングブレード 140に比べて、ブレード部材 2の取付位置に対する誤差の影響が少ない。したがつ て、ブレード部材 2を感光体ドラム 11からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置 により精度良く取付けることができる。このように本実施形態ではブレード部材 2を精 度良く取付けることができるので、体積平均粒径が 10 mを超えるような大粒径トナ 一が用いられる場合だけでなぐ小粒径トナーが用いられる場合であっても、トナー すり抜け現象を防止し、画質の低下を防ぐことができる。このように本実施形態のタリ 一ユングブレード 1は、特に小粒径トナーが用いられる場合にトナーすり抜け現象を 防止し、画質の低下を防ぐことができるので、好適である。また誤差の影響が少ない ことによって、取付けるときの調整も容易になるので、本実施形態のクリーニングブレ ード 1は容易に取付けることができる。  As described above, in this embodiment, the blade member 2 is attached more than the conventional cleaning blade 140 in which the blade member 142 is attached to the stepped portion 143 formed in the blade support member 141 as shown in FIG. The influence of the error on the position is small. Therefore, the blade member 2 can be accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it. Thus, in this embodiment, since the blade member 2 can be attached with high accuracy, a small particle size toner is used only when a large particle size toner having a volume average particle size exceeding 10 m is used. Even in this case, the toner slip-through phenomenon can be prevented and the image quality can be prevented from deteriorating. As described above, the tail wing blade 1 of the present embodiment is preferable because it can prevent the toner slip-through phenomenon and lower the image quality, particularly when a small-diameter toner is used. Further, since the influence of the error is small, the adjustment at the time of mounting becomes easy, so that the cleaning blade 1 of this embodiment can be easily mounted.
また本実施形態では、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード 部材 2の位置を調整することができるので、ブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aをより確実に 設定当接位置 90に配置することができ、ブレード部材 2を感光体ドラム 11からトナー を除去して清掃するのに適した位置に一層精度良く取付けることができる。  In the present embodiment, the position of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted, so that the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is more reliably disposed at the set contact position 90. Therefore, the blade member 2 can be attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it with higher accuracy.
ブレード取付部 29に取付けられるとき、クリーニングブレード 1は、たとえば図 6に示 す位置決め装置 40によって位置決めされる。図 6は、本発明の実施の第 3形態であ る位置決め装置 40の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す概略図である。位置決め装置 40は、取 付調整部 41と検査部 42とを含んで構成される。取付調整部 41は、大略的に、第 1撮 像部 43と、第 2撮像部 44と、クリーニングブレード 1の位置決めの基準となる位置を 示す原器 45と、後述する図 7〜9に示す搬送部 46とを含む。第 1撮像部 43は、第 1 位置検出手段である第 1カメラ 47と、第 2位置検出手段である第 2カメラ 48とを含む。 第 2撮像部 44は、もう一つの第 1位置検出手段である第 3カメラ 49と、もう一つの第 2 位置検出手段である第 4カメラ 50とを含む。第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44は、ク リー-ングブレード 1および原器 45を撮像する。本実施形態において第 1〜第 4カメ ラ 47〜50は、多階調、たとえば 256階調で撮像可能に構成される。 When attached to the blade attachment portion 29, the cleaning blade 1 is positioned by, for example, a positioning device 40 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the positioning device 40 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. The positioning device 40 includes an attachment adjustment unit 41 and an inspection unit 42. The mounting adjustment section 41 is roughly It includes an image unit 43, a second imaging unit 44, an original device 45 that indicates a position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade 1, and a transport unit 46 shown in FIGS. The first imaging unit 43 includes a first camera 47 as first position detection means and a second camera 48 as second position detection means. The second imaging unit 44 includes a third camera 49, which is another first position detection means, and a fourth camera 50, which is another second position detection means. The first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 image the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45. In the present embodiment, the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are configured to be capable of imaging with multiple gradations, for example, 256 gradations.
クリーニングブレード 1および原器 45は、搬送部 46によって矢符 51で示されるタリ 一二ングブレード 1の長手方向の一方に搬送される。クリーニングブレード 1および原 器 45が搬送されていない静止状態において、第 1撮像部 43はクリーニングブレード 1の長手方向他端部 Aに臨むように設けられ、第 2撮像部 44はクリーニングブレード 1 の長手方向一端部 Cに臨むように設けられる。クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向他 端部 Aは第 1撮像部 43によって撮像され、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向一端部 Cは第 2撮像部 44によって撮像される。クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向の両端部 A, C間の中間部は、クリーニングブレード 1が長手方向一方 51に搬送される間に第 2撮像部 44によって撮像される。  The cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are transported by the transport unit 46 to one side of the longitudinal direction of the vertical blade 1 indicated by an arrow 51. In a stationary state where the cleaning blade 1 and the master 45 are not conveyed, the first imaging unit 43 is provided so as to face the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and the second imaging unit 44 is disposed in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1. It is provided so as to face one end C in the direction. The other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the first imaging unit 43, and the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the second imaging unit 44. An intermediate portion between both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the second imaging unit 44 while the cleaning blade 1 is transported to one longitudinal direction 51.
検査部 42は、取付調整部 41の第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44で撮像された画 像の情報が入力される処理部 52と、処理部 52に入力される画像情報に基づいて、 画像を表示する出力手段である表示部 53と、処理部 52および表示部 53が載置され る検査台 54とを含む。処理部 52は、中央処理装置(Central Processing Unit ;略称 C PU)によって実現される。処理部 52は、取付調整部 41および表示部 53の動作を制 御する。本実施形態において表示部 53は、多階調、たとえば 256階調で画像を表 示可能に構成される。表示部 53は、たとえば CRT (Cathode Ray Tube)ディスプレイ によって実現される。  The inspection unit 42 is based on the processing unit 52 to which image information captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 of the attachment adjustment unit 41 is input, and the image information input to the processing unit 52. A display unit 53 that is an output means for displaying an image, and an inspection table 54 on which the processing unit 52 and the display unit 53 are placed. The processing unit 52 is realized by a central processing unit (abbreviated as CPU). The processing unit 52 controls the operation of the mounting adjustment unit 41 and the display unit 53. In the present embodiment, the display unit 53 is configured to be able to display an image with multiple gradations, for example, 256 gradations. The display unit 53 is realized by, for example, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44で撮像されたクリーニングブレード 1および原器 45の画像は表示部 53に表示される。表示部 53は、たとえば表示画面を第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44に備わるカメラの数と同数に分割し、第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44によって撮像された画像を一画面に表示する。本実施形態では第 1撮像 部 43および第 2撮像部 44はそれぞれ 2つのカメラを備えるので、表示部 53の表示画 面は 4分割され、 4つの画像が一画面に表示される。 The images of the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are displayed on the display unit 53. For example, the display unit 53 divides the display screen into the same number as the cameras provided in the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44, and images captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are displayed on one screen. To display. In this embodiment, the first imaging Since the unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 each include two cameras, the display screen of the display unit 53 is divided into four, and four images are displayed on one screen.
図 7は位置決め装置 40に備わる取付調整部 41の構成を示す側面図であり、図 8は 取付調整部 41の構成を示す正面図であり、図 9は取付調整部 41の構成を示す平面 図である。図 9では、図 7および図 8に示す第 1撮像部 43の第 2カメラ 48および第 2支 持手段 58、ならびに第 2撮像部 44の第 3カメラ 49および第 3支持手段 59は、図面が 錯綜して理解が困難になるので、記載を省略する。前述の図 6に示すクリーニングブ レード 1の移動方向 51は、図 9に示すシャフト 66の長手方向の一方に相当する。図 9 に示すシャフト 66の長手方向を X方向と定義し、基台 56の厚み方向を Z方向と定義 し、 X方向および Z方向に直交する方向を Y方向と定義する。本実施形態では、 Z方 向は鉛直方向に一致する方向である。各図において、これら X、 Υ、 Ζ方向を矢符 X、 Υ、 Ζで表す。図 7は、取付調整部 41を X方向の他方側から見た側面図に相当する。 取付調整部 41は、第 1撮像部 43、第 2撮像部 44、原器 45、支持部 55、搬送部 46、 基台 56および間隔調整手段 72を含んで構成される。図 8では、図 7および図 9に示 す間隔調整手段 72は、図面が錯綜して理解が困難になるので、記載は省略する。 第 1撮像部 43と第 2撮像部 44とは、一対になっており、左右対称に構成される。 第 1撮像部 43は、第 1カメラ 47と、第 2カメラ 48と、第 1カメラ 47を支持する第 1支持 手段 57と、第 2カメラ 48を支持する第 2支持手段 58とを含む。第 1カメラ 47は、撮像 中心であるレンズの光軸が延びる方向(以後、光軸方向とも称する)に移動可能に第 1支持手段 57に支持される。第 1カメラ 47は、レンズの光軸方向に移動させることに よって、焦点合わせを行なうことができる。第 1カメラ 47の焦点合わせは、たとえば、 第 1カメラ 47によってクリーニングブレード 1を撮像させ、撮像された画像を前述の図 6に示す表示部 53に多階調たとえば 256階調で表示させ、表示部 53に表示された 画像が鮮明になるように第 1カメラ 47をレンズの光軸方向に移動させることによって 行なうことができる。本実施形態では、第 1カメラ 47のレンズの光軸方向は、 Υ方向に 一致する。  7 is a side view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41 provided in the positioning device 40, FIG. 8 is a front view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41, and FIG. 9 is a plan view showing the configuration of the mounting adjustment section 41. It is. In FIG. 9, the second camera 48 and the second support means 58 of the first imaging unit 43 and the third camera 49 and the third support means 59 of the second imaging unit 44 shown in FIGS. Since it becomes difficult to understand due to confusion, the description is omitted. The moving direction 51 of the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 6 corresponds to one of the longitudinal directions of the shaft 66 shown in FIG. The longitudinal direction of the shaft 66 shown in FIG. 9 is defined as the X direction, the thickness direction of the base 56 is defined as the Z direction, and the direction perpendicular to the X direction and the Z direction is defined as the Y direction. In the present embodiment, the Z direction is a direction that coincides with the vertical direction. In each figure, these X, Υ, and Ζ directions are represented by arrows X, Υ, and Ζ. FIG. 7 corresponds to a side view of the mounting adjustment portion 41 as viewed from the other side in the X direction. The attachment adjustment unit 41 includes a first imaging unit 43, a second imaging unit 44, a master 45, a support unit 55, a transport unit 46, a base 56, and a distance adjustment unit 72. In FIG. 8, the interval adjusting means 72 shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 is omitted because it is difficult to understand because the drawings are complicated. The first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are paired and configured to be bilaterally symmetric. The first imaging unit 43 includes a first camera 47, a second camera 48, first support means 57 that supports the first camera 47, and second support means 58 that supports the second camera 48. The first camera 47 is supported by the first support means 57 so as to be movable in the direction in which the optical axis of the lens that is the imaging center extends (hereinafter also referred to as the optical axis direction). The first camera 47 can be focused by moving in the optical axis direction of the lens. The first camera 47 is focused by, for example, imaging the cleaning blade 1 by the first camera 47 and displaying the captured image on the display unit 53 shown in FIG. This can be done by moving the first camera 47 in the direction of the optical axis of the lens so that the image displayed in the section 53 becomes clear. In the present embodiment, the optical axis direction of the lens of the first camera 47 coincides with the heel direction.
第 2カメラ 48は、第 1カメラ 47と同様に、レンズの光軸方向に移動可能に第 2支持 手段 58に支持され、レンズの光軸方向の移動によって焦点合わせを行なうことがで きる。第 2支持手段 58は支持部 55に支持される。本実施形態では、第 2支持手段 58 が支持される支持部 55の支持面はテーパ状に形成される。これによつて、第 2支持 手段 58は Y方向に対して傾斜して支持されるので、第 2カメラ 48の撮像中心であるレ ンズの光軸は Z方向に対して傾斜する。 Similar to the first camera 47, the second camera 48 is supported by the second support means 58 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction. wear. The second support means 58 is supported by the support portion 55. In the present embodiment, the support surface of the support portion 55 on which the second support means 58 is supported is formed in a tapered shape. Accordingly, the second support means 58 is supported while being inclined with respect to the Y direction, so that the optical axis of the lens, which is the imaging center of the second camera 48, is inclined with respect to the Z direction.
第 2撮像部 44は、第 3カメラ 49と、第 4カメラ 50と、第 3カメラ 49を支持する第 3支持 手段 59と、第 4カメラ 50を支持する第 4支持手段 60とを含む。第 3カメラ 49は、第 1力 メラ 47と同様に、レンズの光軸方向に移動可能に第 3支持手段 59に支持され、レン ズの光軸方向の移動によって焦点合わせを行なうことができる。第 4カメラ 50は、第 2 カメラ 48と同様に、レンズの光軸方向に移動可能に第 4支持手段 60に支持され、レ ンズの光軸方向の移動によって焦点合わせを行なうことができる。第 4支持手段 60は 、第 2支持手段 58と同様に支持部 55に支持される。本実施形態において第 4支持 手段 60は、第 2支持手段 58と同様に、支持部 55のテーパ状の支持面に支持される ので、第 4カメラ 50の撮像中心であるレンズの光軸は Z方向に対して傾斜する。  The second imaging unit 44 includes a third camera 49, a fourth camera 50, third support means 59 that supports the third camera 49, and fourth support means 60 that supports the fourth camera 50. Similar to the first force lens 47, the third camera 49 is supported by the third support means 59 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction. Similar to the second camera 48, the fourth camera 50 is supported by the fourth support means 60 so as to be movable in the optical axis direction of the lens, and can be focused by moving the lens in the optical axis direction. The fourth support means 60 is supported by the support portion 55 in the same manner as the second support means 58. In the present embodiment, the fourth support means 60 is supported by the tapered support surface of the support portion 55 in the same manner as the second support means 58, so that the optical axis of the lens that is the imaging center of the fourth camera 50 is Z. Inclined with respect to direction.
第 1〜第 4カメラ 47〜50は、たとえば、電荷結合素子(Charge Coupled Device ;略 称 CCD)を備える CCDカメラによって実現される。第 1〜第 4カメラ 47〜50は、移動 台 61に設けられる保持手段 65に保持されるクリーニングブレード 1のブレード部材 2 および原器 45に備わる第 1ナイフ 81および第 2ナイフ 82を撮像し、撮像した画像に 基づく画像信号を生成する。第 1〜第 4カメラ 47〜50が生成した画像信号は、前述 の図 6に示す処理部 52に与えられる。処理部 52は、与えられた画像信号に基づい て画像が表示されるように表示部 53を駆動する。表示部 53は、処理部 52からの指 令に基づいて、第 1〜第 4カメラ 47〜50で撮像された画像を表示する。  The first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are realized by, for example, a CCD camera including a charge coupled device (abbreviated as CCD). The first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 take images of the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 provided in the blade member 2 of the cleaning blade 1 and the master 45 held by the holding means 65 provided in the moving table 61, Generate an image signal based on the captured image. The image signals generated by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 are given to the processing unit 52 shown in FIG. The processing unit 52 drives the display unit 53 so that an image is displayed based on the given image signal. The display unit 53 displays images captured by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 based on instructions from the processing unit 52.
より詳細には、処理部 52は、以下のように位置決め装置 40を制御する。処理部 52 による処理は、ブレード取付部 29とブレード取付部 29に仮固定されたクリーニングブ レード 1とが、取付調整部 41の移動台 61に設けられる保持手段 65に保持され、たと えば操作者によって図示しない検査開始ボタンが押下されることによって開始される 。処理部 52は、クリーニングブレード 1のブレード部材 2および原器 45を撮像するよう に、第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44を制御する。第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44は、処理部 52からの指令に基づいて、ブレード部材 2および原器 45を撮像し、撮 像した画像に基づく画像信号を生成し、処理部 52に出力する。処理部 52は、生成さ れた画像情報に基づ ヽて画像を表示するように表示部 53を制御する。表示部 53は 、処理部 52からの指令に基づいて第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44で撮像された 画像を表示する。 More specifically, the processing unit 52 controls the positioning device 40 as follows. In the processing by the processing section 52, the blade mounting section 29 and the cleaning blade 1 temporarily fixed to the blade mounting section 29 are held by the holding means 65 provided on the moving base 61 of the mounting adjustment section 41. For example, the operator Is started by pressing an inspection start button (not shown). The processing unit 52 controls the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 so that the blade member 2 and the original device 45 of the cleaning blade 1 are imaged. The first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 take an image of the blade member 2 and the original device 45 based on a command from the processing unit 52, and take an image. An image signal based on the imaged image is generated and output to the processing unit 52. The processing unit 52 controls the display unit 53 to display an image based on the generated image information. The display unit 53 displays images captured by the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 based on instructions from the processing unit 52.
搬送部 46は、移動台 61、移動台駆動部 62、伝達部 63、案内手段 64および保持 手段 65を含んで構成される。移動台 61は、板状であって、略直方体を成す。保持手 段 65は、移動台 61の厚み方向一方側の表面部に設けられる。保持手段 65は、たと えば図示しな!、把持手段を有し、把持手段で把持することによって前述の図 4に示 すカートリッジ 10のブレード取付部 29および原器 45を保持する。クリーニングブレー ド 1は、ブレード取付部 29を介して保持手段 65に保持される。  The transport unit 46 includes a moving table 61, a moving table driving unit 62, a transmission unit 63, guide means 64, and holding means 65. The movable table 61 is plate-shaped and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The holding means 65 is provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the movable table 61. For example, the holding means 65 has a gripping means (not shown), and holds the blade mounting portion 29 and the master 45 of the cartridge 10 shown in FIG. 4 by gripping with the gripping means. The cleaning blade 1 is held by the holding means 65 via the blade mounting portion 29.
移動台駆動部 62は、移動台 61を駆動して、 X方向に移動させる。移動台駆動部 6 2は、たとえばステッピングモータによって実現される。伝達部 63は、移動台駆動部 6 2からの駆動力を、移動台 61に伝達する。伝達部 63は、 X方向に延び、らせん状に ねじ溝が刻設されるシャフト 66およびシャフト 66のねじ溝に嵌合される図示しないボ ールナットからなる、いわゆるボールねじと、シャフト 66の長手方向両端部を支持す る一対の軸受け 67とを含んで構成される。伝達部 63のシャフト 66の長手方向一端 部は移動台駆動部 62に連結され、シャフト 66のねじ溝に嵌合されるボールナットは 移動台 61に連結される。  The moving table drive unit 62 drives the moving table 61 to move it in the X direction. The movable table drive unit 62 is realized by a stepping motor, for example. The transmission unit 63 transmits the driving force from the moving table driving unit 62 to the moving table 61. The transmission portion 63 extends in the X direction, and is a so-called ball screw including a shaft 66 spirally engraved with a thread groove and a ball nut (not shown) fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66, and the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66. And a pair of bearings 67 that support both ends. One end in the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66 of the transmission part 63 is connected to the moving table driving unit 62, and a ball nut fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66 is connected to the moving table 61.
案内手段 64は、移動台 61を支持する移動台支持部 68と、移動台支持部 68を案 内するガイドレール 69と、ガイドレール 69を支持するレール支持部 70とを含む。移 動台支持部 68は、ガイドレール 69に嵌合可能に構成される。本実施形態において ガイドレール 69は、 X方向に延びて設けられるスライドガイドレールである。レール支 持部 70は、基台 56の厚み方向一方側の表面部に設けられる。  The guide means 64 includes a moving table support portion 68 that supports the moving table 61, a guide rail 69 that includes the moving table support portion 68, and a rail support portion 70 that supports the guide rail 69. The moving table support portion 68 is configured to be able to be fitted to the guide rail 69. In the present embodiment, the guide rail 69 is a slide guide rail provided extending in the X direction. The rail support portion 70 is provided on the surface portion of the base 56 on one side in the thickness direction.
移動台駆動部 62からの駆動力でシャフト 66が回転することによって、シャフト 66の ねじ溝に嵌合されたボールナットが X方向に移動し、移動台 61が案内手段 64に案 内されて X方向に移動する。この移動台 61の X方向の移動に伴って、クリーニングブ レード 1、ブレード取付部 29および原器 45は、 X方向に移動する。このようにして搬 送部 46は、シャフト 66の長手方向である X方向にクリーニングブレード 1、ブレード取 付部 29および原器 45を搬送する。 When the shaft 66 is rotated by the driving force from the moving table drive unit 62, the ball nut fitted in the thread groove of the shaft 66 moves in the X direction, and the moving table 61 is set in the guide means 64 and X Move in the direction. As the moving table 61 moves in the X direction, the cleaning blade 1, the blade mounting portion 29, and the master 45 move in the X direction. In this way, the transport section 46 is arranged in the X direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the shaft 66. Transport appendix 29 and master unit 45.
間隔調整手段 72は、クリーニングブレード 1を移動させることによって、後述する図 11に示すブレード部材 2の第 1方向 84における位置と第 1基準位置 84aとの間隔で ある第 1間隔 D1、およびブレード部材 2の第 2方向 85における位置と第 2基準位置 8 5aとの間隔である第 2間隔 D2を調整する。本実施形態にぉ 、てブレード部材 2の第 1方向 84における位置は、第 1方向 84におけるブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aの位置 であり、ブレード部材 2の第 2方向 85における位置は、第 2方向 85におけるブレード 部材 2のエッジ部 2aの位置である。  The distance adjusting means 72 moves the cleaning blade 1 to move the first distance D1, which is the distance between the position in the first direction 84 of the blade member 2 shown in FIG. 11 described later and the first reference position 84a, and the blade member. The second distance D2, which is the distance between the position of 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a, is adjusted. In this embodiment, the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 is the position of the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84, and the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 is the second position 85. This is the position of the edge portion 2 a of the blade member 2 in the direction 85.
間隔調整手段 72は、保持手段 65に保持されるクリーニングブレード 1を、ブレード 取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向に移動可能に構成される。本実施形態において間 隔調整手段 72は、マイクロメータヘッド 72aと、マイクロメータヘッド 72aを保持する図 示しない保持部材とを含んで構成される。本実施形態では、マイクロメータヘッド 72a は操作者によって操作される。マイクロメータヘッド 72aは、処理部 52に制御される駆 動手段によって駆動されてもよい。マイクロメータヘッド 72aを用いることによって、タリ 一ユングブレード 1の移動量を小さくすることができるので、第 1間隔 D1および第 2間 隔 D2をより容易に調整することができる。  The interval adjusting means 72 is configured to be able to move the cleaning blade 1 held by the holding means 65 in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. In the present embodiment, the interval adjusting means 72 includes a micrometer head 72a and a holding member (not shown) that holds the micrometer head 72a. In the present embodiment, the micrometer head 72a is operated by an operator. The micrometer head 72a may be driven by driving means controlled by the processing unit 52. By using the micrometer head 72a, the amount of movement of the tail blade 1 can be reduced, so that the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 can be adjusted more easily.
間隔調整手段 72は、本実施形態では 2つが設けられる。 2つの間隔調整手段 72の うち、一方は、静止状態においてクリーニングブレード 1の長手方向の一端部に接す るように設けられ、他方は、静止状態においてクリーニングブレード 1の長手方向の他 端部に接するように設けられる。このように 2つの間隔調整手段 72を設け、タリーニン グブレード 1を両端部で移動させて第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を調整することに よって、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向全体にわたって第 1間隔 D1および第 2間 隔 D2を調整することができる。  In the present embodiment, two interval adjusting means 72 are provided. One of the two distance adjusting means 72 is provided so as to be in contact with one end in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 in the stationary state, and the other is disposed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 in the stationary state. It is provided to touch. Thus, by providing the two interval adjusting means 72 and moving the tiling blade 1 at both ends to adjust the first interval D1 and the second interval D2, the first interval D1 over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is achieved. And the second interval D2 can be adjusted.
基台 56は、板状であって、略直方体を成す。第 1撮像部 43、第 2撮像部 44、支持 部 55、搬送部 46および案内手段 64は、基台 56の厚み方向一方側の表面部に設け られる。基台 56の厚み方向他方側の表面部には脚部 71が設けられる。基台 56は、 脚部 71を介して作業場に設置される。  The base 56 is plate-shaped and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The first imaging unit 43, the second imaging unit 44, the support unit 55, the transport unit 46, and the guide unit 64 are provided on the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction of the base 56. Legs 71 are provided on the surface of the base 56 on the other side in the thickness direction. The base 56 is installed in the work place via the legs 71.
図 10は、図 7に示す位置決め装置 40に備わる原器 45の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す正 面図である。図 10は、原器 45を Y方向他方側から見た図に相当する。図 10には、ク リー-ングブレード 1を合わせて示す。図 11は、図 7に示す原器 45の第 1ナイフ 81お よび第 2ナイフ 82の部分を拡大して示す拡大側面図である。図 11では、クリーニング ブレード 1は、ブレード部材 2のみを記載する。原器 45は、第 1ナイフ 81と、第 2ナイ フ 82と、第 1ナイフ 81および第 2ナイフ 82を保持するナイフ保持部材 83とを含む。第 1ナイフ 81および第 2ナイフ 82は、たとえば接着剤によってナイフ保持部材 83に貼 付けられる。 FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the master 45 provided in the positioning device 40 shown in FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 corresponds to a view of the prototype 45 viewed from the other side in the Y direction. Figure 10 also shows the cleaning blade 1 together. FIG. 11 is an enlarged side view showing the first knife 81 and the second knife 82 of the prototype 45 shown in FIG. 7 in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 11, only the blade member 2 is shown as the cleaning blade 1. The prototype 45 includes a first knife 81, a second knife 82, and a knife holding member 83 that holds the first knife 81 and the second knife 82. The first knife 81 and the second knife 82 are attached to the knife holding member 83 by, for example, an adhesive.
第 1ナイフ 81および第 2ナイフ 82は、平板形状であり、厚み方向に垂直な仮想平 面における断面形状が矩形状である。第 1ナイフ 81は、長手方向が X方向に一致す るように X方向に延びて設けられる。図 10に示すように、第 1ナイフ 81は、長手方向 における長さ寸法が、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向における長さ寸法よりも小さ く形成されており、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向における両端部 A, C間の中間 部に臨むように設けられる。また第 1ナイフ 81は、長手方向における両端部間の中間 部であって、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向における両端部 A, C間の中央部 Bに 臨む部分が切り欠かれ、切欠き部 8 laが形成されている。  The first knife 81 and the second knife 82 have a flat plate shape, and a cross-sectional shape on a virtual plane perpendicular to the thickness direction is a rectangular shape. The first knife 81 is provided so as to extend in the X direction so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the X direction. As shown in FIG. 10, the length of the first knife 81 in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the length of the cleaning blade 1 in the longitudinal direction. , C so as to face the middle part. The first knife 81 is an intermediate portion between both end portions in the longitudinal direction, and a portion facing the central portion B between both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is cut out, so that the cut-out portion 8 la Is formed.
第 2ナイフ 82は、本実施形態では 3つが設けられる。 3つの第 2ナイフ 82は、タリー ユングブレード 1の長手方向における両端部 A, Cおよび両端部 A, C間の中央部 B に臨むようにそれぞれ設けられる。第 2ナイフ 82のうち、クリーニングブレード 1の長手 方向他端部 Aに臨むように設けられる他端部用第 2ナイフ 82a、およびクリーニングブ レード 1の長手方向一端部 Cに臨むように設けられる一端部用第 2ナイフ 82cは、 Y 方向他方側から見たときに、第 1ナイフ 81が設けられていない部分において露出し ている。第 2ナイフ 82のうち、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向における両端部間 A , Cの中央部 Bに臨むように設けられる中央部用第 2ナイフ 82bは、 Y方向他方側か ら見たときに、第 1ナイフ 81の切欠き部分 81aを介して露出している。  In the present embodiment, three second knives 82 are provided. The three second knives 82 are provided so as to face both end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the tally wing blade 1 and a central portion B between both end portions A and C, respectively. Of the second knife 82, the second knife 82a for the other end provided so as to face the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and one end provided so as to face the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1. The second knife for part 82c is exposed at a portion where the first knife 81 is not provided when viewed from the other side in the Y direction. Among the second knives 82, the second knife 82b for the central portion provided so as to face the central portion B between the two end portions A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 is viewed from the other side in the Y direction. The first knife 81 is exposed through the notch 81a.
クリーニングブレード 1および原器 45が X方向一方に搬送されていない静止状態に おいて、前述の図 6に示す第 1撮像部 43の第 1カメラ 47は、より詳細には、第 1ナイフ 81の長手方向他端部に臨むように設けられ、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向他端 部 A寄りの部分および第 1ナイフ 81の長手方向他端部を撮像する。第 2カメラ 48は、 他端部用第 2ナイフ 82aを臨むように設けられ、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向他 端部 Aおよび他端部用第 2ナイフ 82aを撮像する。 In a stationary state where the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are not conveyed in one of the X directions, the first camera 47 of the first imaging unit 43 shown in FIG. It is provided so as to face the other end portion in the longitudinal direction, and images a portion near the other end portion A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the other end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81. The second camera 48 It is provided so as to face the second knife 82a for the other end, and images the other end A in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the second knife 82a for the other end.
第 2撮像部 44の第 3カメラ 49は、第 1ナイフ 81の長手方向一端部に臨むように設け られ、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向一端部 C寄りの部分および第 1ナイフ 81の 長手方向一端部を撮像する。第 4カメラ 50は、一端部用第 2ナイフ 82cを臨むように 設けられ、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向一端部 Cおよび一端部用第 2ナイフ 82c を撮像する。  The third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44 is provided so as to face one end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81, the portion near the longitudinal end portion C of the cleaning blade 1 and the one end portion in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81. Image. The fourth camera 50 is provided so as to face the second knife 82c for one end, and images the one end C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the second knife 82c for one end.
またクリーニングブレード 1および原器 45は、 X方向一方に搬送される間に、第 3力 メラ 49および第 4カメラ 50によって撮像される。より詳細には、第 3カメラ 49は、第 1ナ ィフ 81の長手方向における切欠き部分 81aを除く残余の部分およびその残余の部 分に臨むクリーニングブレード 1を撮像する。第 4カメラ 50は、クリーニングブレード 1 および原器 45の長手方向における中央部が第 4カメラ 50に臨む位置に搬送されて きたときに、第 1ナイフ 81の切欠き部分 81aにおいて露出する中央部用第 2ナイフ 82 bおよび中央部用第 2ナイフ 82bに臨むクリーニングブレード 1を撮像する。これによ つてクリーニングブレード 1を長手方向全体にわたって撮像することができる。  The cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are imaged by the third force lens 49 and the fourth camera 50 while being conveyed in one direction in the X direction. More specifically, the third camera 49 images the remaining part excluding the notch part 81a in the longitudinal direction of the first nifty 81 and the cleaning blade 1 facing the remaining part. The fourth camera 50 is for the central portion exposed at the notch portion 81a of the first knife 81 when the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 is conveyed to the position facing the fourth camera 50. The cleaning blade 1 facing the second knife 82b and the central second knife 82b is imaged. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 can be imaged over the entire length.
図 11に示すように、第 1ナイフ 81は、予め定める第 1方向 84において、前述の設定 当接位置 90から間隔 D1を空けて設けられる。第 2ナイフ 82は、第 1方向 84に略垂  As shown in FIG. 11, the first knife 81 is provided at a distance D1 from the set contact position 90 described above in a first direction 84 determined in advance. The second knife 82 is generally suspended in the first direction 84.
0  0
直な第 2方向 85において、設定当接位置 90から間隔 D2を空けて設けられる。「第 1 In the second straight direction 85, the distance D2 is provided from the set contact position 90. "First
0  0
方向と第 2方向とが略垂直である」とは、第 1方向 84と第 2方向 85との成す角度 0 The direction and the second direction are substantially perpendicular ”means that the angle formed by the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is 0.
12 が、 70° 以上 90° 以下であることを意味する。本実施形態では、第 1方向 84と第 2 方向 85との成す角度 0 は、約 74° である。また第 1方向 84は Z方向に一致する方  12 means 70 degrees or more and 90 degrees or less. In the present embodiment, the angle 0 formed by the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is about 74 °. The first direction 84 matches the Z direction.
12  12
向であり、第 2方向 85はブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向に一致する方向 である。 The second direction 85 coincides with the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29.
第 1ナイフ 81の遊端部である第 1ナイフエッジ部 81bは、クリーニングブレード 1の 第 1方向 84における位置決めの基準となる第 1基準位置 84aを示す。第 2ナイフ 82 の遊端部である第 2ナイフエッジ部 82dは、クリーニングブレード 1の第 2方向 85にお ける位置決めの基準となる第 2基準位置 85aを示す。  A first knife edge portion 81b that is a free end portion of the first knife 81 indicates a first reference position 84a that serves as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade 1 in the first direction 84. A second knife edge portion 82d, which is a free end portion of the second knife 82, indicates a second reference position 85a that serves as a positioning reference in the second direction 85 of the cleaning blade 1.
原器 45は、第 1ナイフ 81が第 1方向 84において設定当接位置 90から間隔 D1を 空けて配置され、第 2ナイフ 82が第 2方向 85において設定当接位置 90から間隔 D2 を空けて配置されるように、図示しない原器保持手段によって保持されている。第 1In the original 45, the first knife 81 has a distance D1 from the set contact position 90 in the first direction 84. The second knife 82 is held by a master holding means (not shown) so as to be spaced from the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85 by a distance D2. First
0 0
方向 84における第 1基準位置 84aと設定当接位置 90との間隔 D1は、たとえば 0. 5 The distance D1 between the first reference position 84a in the direction 84 and the set contact position 90 is, for example, 0.5
0  0
mm以上 0. 6mm以下に設定される。第 2方向 85における第 2基準位置 85aと設定 当接位置 90との間隔 D2は、たとえば 0. 7mm以上 0. 8mm以下に設定される。 It is set to mm or more and 0.6 mm or less. The distance D2 between the second reference position 85a and the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85 is set to be not less than 0.7 mm and not more than 0.8 mm, for example.
0  0
第 1位置検出手段である第 1撮像部 43の第 1カメラ 47は、レンズの光軸 47aが第 1 方向 84に垂直になるように配置される。第 1カメラ 47は、ブレード部材 2および第 1ナ ィフ 81を撮像することによって、ブレード部材 2の第 1方向 84における位置および第 1基準位置 84aを検出する。第 2位置検出手段である第 1撮像部 43の第 2カメラ 48は 、レンズの光軸 48aが第 2方向 85に垂直になるように配置される。第 2カメラ 48は、ブ レード部材 2および第 2ナイフ 82を撮像することによって、ブレード部材 2の第 2方向 8 5における位置および第 2基準位置 85aを検出する。  The first camera 47 of the first imaging unit 43 serving as the first position detecting means is arranged so that the optical axis 47a of the lens is perpendicular to the first direction 84. The first camera 47 detects the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 and the first reference position 84a by imaging the blade member 2 and the first niff 81. The second camera 48 of the first imaging unit 43 serving as the second position detecting means is arranged so that the optical axis 48a of the lens is perpendicular to the second direction 85. The second camera 48 detects the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a by imaging the blade member 2 and the second knife 82.
第 1カメラ 47および第 2カメラ 48によって撮像された画像は、前述の図 6に示す表 示部 53に表示される。処理部 52は、第 1カメラ 47および第 2カメラ 48によって撮像さ れた多階調の画像をそれぞれ 2値化処理し、 2値化画像として表示部 53に表示させ る。本実施形態において処理部 52は、第 1カメラ 47によって撮像された画像の画像 情報から、第 1方向 84におけるブレード部材 2と第 1基準位置 84aとの間隔である第 1間隔 D1を求め、撮像された画像とともに表示部 53に表示させる。また処理部 52は 、第 2カメラ 48によって撮像された画像の画像情報から、第 2方向 85におけるブレー ド部材 2と第 2基準位置 85aとの間隔である第 2間隔 D2を求め、撮像された画像とと もに表示部 53に表示させる。  Images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48 are displayed on the display unit 53 shown in FIG. The processing unit 52 binarizes each of the multi-tone images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48 and displays them on the display unit 53 as a binarized image. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 52 obtains a first interval D1 that is an interval between the blade member 2 and the first reference position 84a in the first direction 84 from the image information of the image captured by the first camera 47, and captures the image. The image is displayed on the display unit 53 together with the displayed image. Further, the processing unit 52 obtains the second interval D2 that is the interval between the blade member 2 and the second reference position 85a in the second direction 85 from the image information of the image captured by the second camera 48, and the image is captured. The image is displayed on the display unit 53 together with the image.
本実施形態では、操作者が、表示部 53に表示される画像に基づいて間隔調整手 段 72を操作することによってクリーニングブレード 1が移動され、ブレード取付部 29 の基準面に平行な方向におけるクリーニングブレード 1の位置が調整される。より詳 細には、クリーニングブレード 1は、第 1カメラ 47によって撮像された画像において第 1間隔 D 1が予め規定される範囲内に含まれ、第 2カメラ 48によって撮像される画像 において第 2間隔 D2が予め規定される範囲内に含まれるように、間隔調整手段 72 によって移動され、位置決めされる。このように第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2がいず れも予め規定される範囲内に含まれる状態にクリーニングブレード 1を位置決めする ことによって、ブレードエッジ部 2aをより確実に設定当接位置 90に位置させることが できる。 In the present embodiment, the cleaning blade 1 is moved by the operator operating the interval adjusting unit 72 based on the image displayed on the display unit 53, and cleaning in a direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting unit 29 is performed. The position of blade 1 is adjusted. More specifically, the cleaning blade 1 includes the first interval D1 within the range defined in advance in the image captured by the first camera 47, and the second interval in the image captured by the second camera 48. It is moved and positioned by the interval adjusting means 72 so that D2 is included in a predetermined range. Thus, the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are not used. By positioning the cleaning blade 1 in a state that is also included in a predetermined range, the blade edge portion 2a can be more reliably positioned at the set contact position 90.
第 1間隔 D1が含まれるべき予め規定される範囲は、第 1方向 84における第 1基準 位置 84aと設定当接位置 90との間隔 D1を基準として予め定められる許容範囲を含  The predetermined range in which the first interval D1 should be included includes an allowable range that is predetermined based on the interval D1 between the first reference position 84a and the set contact position 90 in the first direction 84.
0  0
む範囲に選ばれる。前述のように前記間隔 D1が 0. 5mm以上 0. 6mm以下である Selected. As described above, the distance D1 is 0.5 mm or more and 0.6 mm or less.
0  0
場合、前記間隔 D1を基準として ± 50 ;ζ ΐηの範囲が許容範囲であり、第 1間隔 D1が In this case, the range of ± 50; ζ ΐη is an allowable range with respect to the interval D1, and the first interval D1 is
0  0
含まれるべき予め規定される範囲は、(D1 — 50) ;z m以上(D1 + 50) m以下の The predefined range to be included is (D1 — 50); z m or more (D1 + 50) m or less
0 0  0 0
範囲に選ばれる。第 2間隔 D2が含まれるべき予め規定される範囲は、第 2方向 85に おける第 2基準位置 85aと設定当接位置 90との間隔 D2を基準として予め定められ Selected for the range. The predetermined range in which the second distance D2 should be included is determined in advance based on the distance D2 between the second reference position 85a and the set contact position 90 in the second direction 85.
0  0
る許容範囲を含む範囲に選ばれる。前述のように前記間隔 D2が 0. 7mm以上 0. 8 Is selected within a range that includes the allowable range. As described above, the distance D2 is 0.7 mm or more 0.8.
0  0
mm以下である場合、前記間隔 D2を基準として ± 50 mの範囲が許容範囲であり If it is less than or equal to mm, the allowable range is ± 50 m with respect to the distance D2.
0  0
、第 2間隔 D2が含まれるべき予め規定される範囲は、(D2—50) m以上(D2 +  , The pre-defined range that should include the second interval D2 is (D2−50) m or more (D2 +
0 0 0 0
50) m以下の範囲に選ばれる。 50) Selected in the range of m or less.
このように本実施形態では、ブレードエッジ部 2aを二方向から観察して、第 1方向 8 4および第 2方向 85の双方において、ブレードエッジ部 2aと基準位置 84a, 85aとの 間隔 Dl, D2が予め規定される範囲内に含まれるように、ブレード取付部 29の基準 面に平行な方向におけるクリーニングブレード 1の位置を調整する。これによつて、ク リー-ングブレード 1をより確実にブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90に位置した 状態に位置決めすることができる。  Thus, in this embodiment, the blade edge portion 2a is observed from two directions, and the distance between the blade edge portion 2a and the reference positions 84a and 85a in both the first direction 84 and the second direction 85 is Dl, D2. The position of the cleaning blade 1 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is adjusted so that is included in a predetermined range. As a result, the cleaning blade 1 can be more reliably positioned in a state in which the blade edge portion 2a is positioned at the set contact position 90.
図 12は、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるクリーニングブレード 1 の位置を調整する様子を模式的に示す図である。図 12では、ブレードエッジ部 2aが 設定当接位置 90に位置するときのブレード部材 2を二点鎖線で示し、ブレードエッジ 部 2aが設定当接位置 90からずれているときのブレード部材 2'を実線で示す。第 1方 向 84におけるブレード部材 2と第 1基準位置 84aとの間隔である第 1間隔 D1のみに 基づいて、第 1間隔 D1が予め規定される範囲内に含まれるようにクリーニングブレー ド 1の位置を調整して位置決めすると、ブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90に位 置しな 、ことがある。たとえば実線で示されるようにブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接位 置 90からずれている場合、第 2方向 85におけるブレード部材 2'と第 2基準位置 85a との間隔 D2'が予め規定される範囲内に含まれていなくても、第 1方向 84におけるブ レード部材 2'と第 1基準位置 84aとの間隔 D1 'は、予め規定される範囲内に含まれ ることがある。したがって、ブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90に位置していなく ても、設定当接位置 90に位置していると判断され、ブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接 位置 90に位置して 、な 、状態で位置決めされるおそれがある。 FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing how the position of the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. FIG. In FIG. 12, the blade member 2 when the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the blade member 2 'when the blade edge portion 2a is displaced from the set contact position 90 is shown. Shown in solid line. Based on only the first distance D1, which is the distance between the blade member 2 and the first reference position 84a in the first direction 84, the cleaning blade 1 is adjusted so that the first distance D1 is included in a predetermined range. When the position is adjusted, the blade edge 2a may not be positioned at the set contact position 90. For example, as shown by the solid line, the blade edge 2a If the distance D2 ′ between the blade member 2 ′ and the second reference position 85a in the second direction 85 is not included in the predetermined range, the blade in the first direction 84 The distance D1 ′ between the member 2 ′ and the first reference position 84a may be included within a predetermined range. Therefore, even if the blade edge portion 2a is not located at the set contact position 90, it is determined that the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90, and the blade edge portion 2a is located at the set contact position 90. There is a risk of positioning in the state.
このようにクリーニングブレード 1を一方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置と基準位 置との間隔のみに基づいて位置決めすると、ブレードエッジ部 2aが設定当接位置 90 に位置して ヽな 、状態で位置決めされ、クリーニングブレード 1がブレード取付部 29 に取付けられるおそれがある。  As described above, when the cleaning blade 1 is positioned based only on the distance between the position of the blade member 2 and the reference position in one direction, the blade edge portion 2a is positioned at the set contact position 90, and is positioned in a state where The cleaning blade 1 may be attached to the blade attachment portion 29.
本実施形態では、前述のようにクリーニングブレード 1を二方向におけるブレード部 材 2の位置と基準位置との間隔に基づいて位置決めするので、一方向におけるブレ 一ド部材 2の位置と基準位置との間隔のみに基づいて位置決めする場合に比べて、 ブレードエッジ部 2aをより確実に設定当接位置 90に配置することができ、タリーニン グブレード 1を精度良く位置決めして取付けることができる。  In this embodiment, since the cleaning blade 1 is positioned based on the distance between the position of the blade member 2 in two directions and the reference position as described above, the position of the blade member 2 in one direction and the reference position are determined. Compared with the case of positioning based only on the interval, the blade edge 2a can be more reliably arranged at the set contact position 90, and the tiling blade 1 can be positioned and attached with high accuracy.
第 2撮像部 44も第 1撮像部 43と同様に構成される。より詳細には、もう一つの第 1位 置検出手段である第 2撮像部 44の第 3カメラ 49は、第 1カメラ 47と同様に、レンズの 光軸が第 1方向 84に垂直になるように配置される。もう一つの第 2位置検出手段であ る第 2撮像部 44の第 4カメラ 50は、第 2カメラ 48と同様に、レンズの光軸が第 2方向 8 5に垂直になるように配置される。第 3カメラ 49および第 4カメラ 50によって撮像され た画像も第 1カメラ 47および第 2カメラ 48によって撮像された画像と同様に 2値ィ匕画 像として前述の図 6に示す表示部 53に表示される。また表示部 53には、処理部 52 によって求められる第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2がそれぞれ表示される。これによ つて第 2撮像部 44が設けられるクリーニングブレード 1の長手方向一端部 C付近にお いても、二方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置と基準位置との間隔に基づいて、タリ 一ユングブレード 1を位置決めすることができる。  The second imaging unit 44 is configured similarly to the first imaging unit 43. More specifically, as with the first camera 47, the third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44, which is another first position detection means, is arranged so that the optical axis of the lens is perpendicular to the first direction 84. Placed in. As with the second camera 48, the fourth camera 50 of the second imaging unit 44, which is another second position detection means, is arranged so that the optical axis of the lens is perpendicular to the second direction 85. . Similar to the images captured by the first camera 47 and the second camera 48, the images captured by the third camera 49 and the fourth camera 50 are also displayed on the display unit 53 shown in FIG. 6 described above. Is done. Further, the display unit 53 displays the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 obtained by the processing unit 52, respectively. Accordingly, even in the vicinity of one end portion C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1 where the second imaging unit 44 is provided, the tailing blade 1 is based on the distance between the position of the blade member 2 in two directions and the reference position. Can be positioned.
このように本実施形態では、第 1撮像部 43および第 2撮像部 44が設けられる長手 方向両端部 A, C付近においてクリーニングブレード 1を位置決めするので、ブレード エッジ部 2aをブレード部材 2の長手方向全体にわたってより容易に設定当接位置 90 に配置させて位置決めすることができる。 As described above, in this embodiment, the cleaning blade 1 is positioned in the vicinity of both longitudinal ends A and C where the first imaging unit 43 and the second imaging unit 44 are provided. The edge portion 2a can be positioned and positioned at the set contact position 90 more easily over the entire longitudinal direction of the blade member 2.
また本実施形態では、位置決め装置 40は、搬送部 46によってクリーニングブレー ド 1および原器 45を X方向一方に搬送させながら、第 2撮像部 44によってタリーニン グブレード 1および原器 45を撮像させる。より詳細には、第 2撮像部 44の第 3カメラ 4 9が第 1ナイフ 81の長手方向における切欠き部分 81aを除く残余の部分およびその 残余の部分に臨むクリーニングブレード 1を撮像し、第 4カメラ 50が第 1ナイフ 81の切 欠き部分 81aにおいて露出する中央部用第 2ナイフ 82bおよび中央部用第 2ナイフ 8 2bに臨むクリーニングブレード 1を撮像する。このようにして撮像された画像の画像情 報から、処理部 52がクリーニングブレード 1の長手方向全体にわたって第 1間隔 D1 および第 2間隔 D2を求め、表示部 53に表示させる。  In this embodiment, the positioning device 40 causes the second imaging unit 44 to image the tally blade 1 and the master 45 while the transport unit 46 transports the cleaning blade 1 and the master 45 in the X direction. More specifically, the third camera 49 of the second imaging unit 44 images the remaining portion excluding the cutout portion 81a in the longitudinal direction of the first knife 81 and the cleaning blade 1 facing the remaining portion, The camera 50 images the cleaning blade 1 facing the second knife 82b for the central portion and the second knife 82b for the central portion exposed at the notch 81a of the first knife 81. From the image information of the image thus captured, the processing unit 52 obtains the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and displays them on the display unit 53.
これによつて操作者は、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向全体にわたって第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2が予め規定される範囲内に含まれるか否かを判断し、第 1間 隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を予め規定される範囲内に含まれるように調整することがで きる。したがって、ブレード部材 2の長手方向全体にわたってブレードエッジ部 2aをよ り確実に設定当接位置 90に配置させて位置決めすることができるので、クリーニング ブレード 1の取付精度を向上させることができる。  Accordingly, the operator determines whether or not the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in a predetermined range over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, and the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are determined. The interval D2 can be adjusted to fall within a predefined range. Accordingly, since the blade edge portion 2a can be more reliably disposed and positioned at the set contact position 90 over the entire longitudinal direction of the blade member 2, the mounting accuracy of the cleaning blade 1 can be improved.
このように本実施形態にお!、て搬送部 46および第 2撮像部 44は、クリーニングブレ ード 1の長手方向全体にわたって、ブレード部材 2の第 1方向 84における位置と第 1 基準位置 84aとの間隔である第 1間隔 D1、およびブレード部材 2の第 2方向 85にお ける位置と第 2基準位置 85aとの間隔である第 2間隔 D2を検出する間隔検出手段を 構成する。間隔検出手段を備えることによって、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向全 体にわたって第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を検出することができるので、タリーニン グブレード 1の長手方向全体にわたって第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を規定される 範囲内に調整し、ブレードエッジ部 2aをより確実に設定当接位置 90に配置させてク リー-ングブレード 1を位置決めすることができる。  As described above, in the present embodiment, the conveying unit 46 and the second imaging unit 44 are arranged such that the position of the blade member 2 in the first direction 84 and the first reference position 84a are arranged over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1. The interval detector is configured to detect the first interval D1 that is the interval between the second direction D2 and the second interval D2 that is the interval between the position of the blade member 2 in the second direction 85 and the second reference position 85a. By providing the interval detection means, it is possible to detect the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 over the entire longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1, so the first interval D1 and the second interval over the entire longitudinal direction of the tiling blade 1. The cleaning blade 1 can be positioned by adjusting D2 within the specified range and placing the blade edge 2a at the set contact position 90 more securely.
クリーニングブレード 1のブレード取付部 29への取付けは、より詳細には本発明の 実施の第 4形態であるクリーニングブレードの取付方法によって実行される。図 13は 、本発明の実施の第 4形態であるクリーニングブレード 1の取付方法の手順を示すフ ローチャートである。クリーニングブレード 1の取付は、ステップ sOで開始される。ステ ップ siでは、前述の図 1に示すスぺーサ 4および図 5に示すスぺーサ 31のように、厚 みおよび傾斜角度 Θ 2の異なる複数のスぺーサを準備する。準備したスぺーサから、 ブレード部材 2と感光体ドラム 11との当接角 θ 1が設定当接角度になるとともに、ブレ 一ド取付部 29の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置が予め定める 位置になるように、スぺーサを選択する。 More specifically, the cleaning blade 1 is mounted on the blade mounting portion 29 by the cleaning blade mounting method according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Figure 13 FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a method for attaching the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. Installation of the cleaning blade 1 is started in step sO. In step si, a plurality of spacers having different thicknesses and inclination angles Θ 2 are prepared, such as the spacer 4 shown in FIG. 1 and the spacer 31 shown in FIG. From the prepared spacer, the contact angle θ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 becomes the set contact angle, and the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 Select the spacer so that is in the predetermined position.
スぺーサの選択は、たとえば、各スぺーサが固定されたクリーニングブレード 1を力 ートリッジ 10に取付けて画像形成装置に搭載し、サンプル画像を記録用紙に連続的 に形成させる実写試験に基づいて行なうことができる。この実写試験において、形成 された画像に掃きむらなどの画像欠陥が少なぐまた感光体ドラム 11の膜減り量が少 なぐ感光体ドラム 11の外周面部への傷の発生が少ないときに取付けられていたス ぺーサが、当接角 θ 1が設定当接角度になるとともにブレード取付部 29の基準面に 垂直な方向におけるブレード部材 2の位置が予め定める位置になるスぺーサとして 選択される。  The selection of the spacer is based on, for example, a live-action test in which the cleaning blade 1 to which each spacer is fixed is attached to the force cartridge 10 and mounted on the image forming apparatus, and sample images are continuously formed on recording paper. Can be done. In this live-action test, it is attached when the formed image has few image defects such as sweeping unevenness and the film thickness of the photosensitive drum 11 is small. The spacer is selected as a spacer in which the contact angle θ 1 becomes the set contact angle and the position of the blade member 2 in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 is a predetermined position.
このようにして選択されたスぺーサをブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 3との間に 介在させてクリーニングブレード 1をブレード取付部 29に仮固定する。これによつてブ レードホルダ 3の姿勢およびブレードホルダ 3とブレード取付部 29との間隔が規定さ れる。このときクリーニングブレード 1は、ブレード取付部 29に完全には固定されず、 ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向に移動可能な状態で固定される。このよう にしてタリ一ユングブレード 1を仮固定し、ステップ s2に進む。  The cleaning blade 1 is temporarily fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 with the spacer selected in this way interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 3. Thereby, the attitude of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 are defined. At this time, the cleaning blade 1 is not completely fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 but is fixed in a movable state in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. In this way, the temporary wing blade 1 is temporarily fixed, and the process proceeds to step s2.
ステップ s2〜s5は、前述の図 6〜図 9に示す位置決め装置 40によって実行される。 ステップ s2では、前述の第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2が規定される範囲内に含ま れるか否かが判断される。本実施形態では第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2が規定さ れる範囲内に含まれる力否かの判断は、位置決め装置 40の表示部 53に表示される 画像に基づいて操作者によって行なわれる。位置決め装置 40では、クリーニングブ レード 1が静止されている状態において、位置決め装置 40の第 1〜第 4カメラ 47〜5 0によってクリーニングブレード 1の両端部 A, C付近が撮像される。操作者は、表示 部 53に表示される画像から、第 1間隔 Dlおよび第 2間隔 D2が規定される範囲内に 含まれるか否かを判断する。 Steps s2 to s5 are executed by the positioning device 40 shown in FIGS. In step s2, it is determined whether or not the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range. In the present embodiment, the operator determines whether or not the force is within the range in which the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are defined based on an image displayed on the display unit 53 of the positioning device 40. In the positioning device 40, the vicinity of both ends A and C of the cleaning blade 1 is imaged by the first to fourth cameras 47 to 50 of the positioning device 40 while the cleaning blade 1 is stationary. The operator displays From the image displayed in the section 53, it is determined whether or not the first interval Dl and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range.
ステップ s2において、第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2が、いずれも規定される範囲 内に含まれると判断されると、ステップ s3に進み、第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2の 少なくともいずれか一方が規定される範囲内に含まれないと判断されると、ステップ s 4に進む。ステップ s4では、間隔調整手段 72でクリーニングブレード 1を移動させるこ とによって、第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を調整し、ステップ s2に戻る。  If it is determined in step s2 that both the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are included in the specified range, the process proceeds to step s3, and at least one of the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 If it is determined that is not included in the specified range, the process proceeds to step s4. In step s4, the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are adjusted by moving the cleaning blade 1 by the interval adjusting means 72, and the process returns to step s2.
ステップ s3では、タリ一ユングブレード 1の長手方向全体にわたって第 1間隔 D1お よび第 2間隔 D2が規定される範囲内に含まれる力否かが判断される。本実施形態で は、まず位置決め装置 40において、搬送部 46によってクリーニングブレード 1および 原器 45を X方向一方に搬送させ、クリーニングブレード 1の長手方向における両端部 A, C間の中間部において一定間隔毎に第 1間隔 D1を求めるとともに、クリーニング ブレード 1の長手方向における両端部間の中央部 Bにおいて第 2間隔 D2を求める。 第 1間隔 D 1を求める間隔は、たとえば搬送部 46による搬送速度および第 2撮像部 4 4による撮像間隔とによって調整することができる。求められた全ての第 1間隔 D1お よび第 2間隔 D2が規定される範囲内に含まれると判断されると、ステップ s6に進み、 V、ずれかが規定される範囲内にな 、と判断されると、ステップ s5に進む。  In step s3, it is determined whether or not the force is included in a range in which the first interval D1 and the second interval D2 are defined over the entire longitudinal direction of the tail blade 1. In the present embodiment, first, in the positioning device 40, the cleaning blade 1 and the original device 45 are transported in one direction in the X direction by the transport unit 46, and at a constant interval in the intermediate portion between both ends A and C in the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 1. Each time, the first interval D1 is obtained, and the second interval D2 is obtained at the central portion B between both end portions of the cleaning blade 1 in the longitudinal direction. The interval for obtaining the first interval D 1 can be adjusted by, for example, the conveyance speed by the conveyance unit 46 and the imaging interval by the second imaging unit 44. When it is determined that all the obtained first intervals D1 and second intervals D2 are included in the specified range, the process proceeds to step s6, and it is determined that V and the deviation are within the specified range. If yes, go to step s5.
ステップ s5では、前述のステップ s4と同様に、間隔調整手段 72でクリーニングブレ ード 1を移動させることによって、第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2を調整し、ステップ s 3に戻る。以上のステップ s2〜5における操作によって、ブレード取付部 29の基準面 に平行な方向であってブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3に取付けられる側の端部か ら感光体ドラム 11に当接される側の端部に向力う方向であるブレード部材 2の短手方 向における位置が予め定める位置になるように、より詳細にはブレード部材 2の短手 方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置が設定当接位置 90になるように調整され、 前述の切欠き部 8によってブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレー ドホルダ 3の位置が規定される。  In step s5, as in step s4 described above, the cleaning blade 1 is moved by the interval adjusting means 72 to adjust the first interval D1 and the second interval D2, and the process returns to step s3. As a result of the operations in steps s2 to 5 described above, the side in contact with the photosensitive drum 11 from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 3 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 More specifically, the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the short direction of the blade member 2 is set so that the position in the short direction of the blade member 2 that is the direction facing the end of the blade member 2 is a predetermined position. The position of the blade holder 3 in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is defined by the notch 8 described above.
ステップ s3において求められた全ての第 1間隔 D1および第 2間隔 D2が規定される 範囲内に含まれると判断され、ステップ s6に進むと、ステップ s6では、クリーニングブ レード 1を取付用ねじ 30によってブレード取付部 29に固定し、ステップ s7に進む。ス テツプ s7にて、クリーニングブレード 1の取付が終了する。 When it is determined that all the first intervals D1 and the second intervals D2 obtained in step s3 are included in the specified range and the process proceeds to step s6, the cleaning block is determined in step s6. Fix raid 1 to blade mounting part 29 with mounting screw 30 and proceed to step s7. At step s7, installation of cleaning blade 1 is completed.
このように本実施形態では、規定部材であるスぺーサの厚みおよび傾斜角度 Θ 2 によって、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの 位置および姿勢を調整し、さらに平行位置規定手段である切欠き部 8によってブレー ド取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置を調整してク リー-ングブレード 1をブレード取付部 29に取付けるので、ブレード部材 2を感光体ド ラム 11からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置である設定当接位置 90に精度 良く取付けることができる。  As described above, in the present embodiment, the position and posture of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 are adjusted by the thickness and the inclination angle Θ 2 of the spacer that is the defining member, and further parallel. The blade member 2 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 by adjusting the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade attachment portion 29 by the notch 8 serving as a position defining means. 2 can be accurately attached to the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it.
以上に述べたように、実施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1は、平行位置規定手 段として切欠き部 8を有するが、平行位置規定手段はこれに限定されず、たとえば図 14に示すクリーニングブレード 100のように、長孔であるホルダ側位置決め孔 102で あってもよい。図 14は、本発明の実施の第 5形態であるクリーニングブレード 100の 構成を簡略ィ匕して示す正面図である。本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 100は、実 施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1に類似し、対応する部分については同一の参 照符号を付して説明を省略する。  As described above, the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment has the notch 8 as the parallel position defining means, but the parallel position defining means is not limited to this, and for example, the cleaning blade shown in FIG. 100 may be a holder side positioning hole 102 which is a long hole. FIG. 14 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The cleaning blade 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.
本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 100において注目すべきは、ブレード支持部材 であるブレードホルダ 101に、扁平で長円形状の長孔であるホルダ側位置決め孔 10 2が形成されていることである。ブレードホルダ 101は、ホルダ側ねじ孔 3aに代えて、 ホルダ側位置決め孔 102が形成されていること以外は、実施の第 1形態におけるブ レードホルダ 3と同様の構成を有する。ホルダ側位置決め孔 102は、ブレードホルダ 101の短手方向に延びて形成される。ホルダ側位置決め孔 102は、ブレードホルダ 1 01の長手方向への移動を防止し、短手方向への移動を許容する。スぺーサ 103に は、ホルダ側位置決め孔 102に対応して、扁平で長円形状の長孔であるスぺーサ側 位置決め孔 104が形成されている。スぺーサ 103は、スぺーサ側ねじ孔 4aに代えて 、スぺーサ側位置決め孔 104が形成されていること以外は、実施の第 1形態における スぺーサ 4と同様の構成を有する。  What should be noted in the cleaning blade 100 of this embodiment is that the blade holder 101 which is a blade support member is formed with a holder-side positioning hole 102 which is a flat and oval long hole. The blade holder 101 has the same configuration as the blade holder 3 in the first embodiment except that a holder-side positioning hole 102 is formed instead of the holder-side screw hole 3a. The holder side positioning hole 102 is formed to extend in the short direction of the blade holder 101. The holder side positioning hole 102 prevents the blade holder 101 from moving in the longitudinal direction and allows movement in the short direction. The spacer 103 is formed with a spacer-side positioning hole 104 corresponding to the holder-side positioning hole 102, which is a flat and oval long hole. Spacer 103 has the same configuration as spacer 4 in the first embodiment except that spacer-side positioning hole 104 is formed instead of spacer-side screw hole 4a.
ブレードホルダ 101は、ホルダ側位置決め孔 102およびスぺーサ側位置決め孔 10 4に揷通されるビスねじなどの取付用ねじ 30によってブレード取付部 29に固定される 。ブレードホルダ 101を短手方向に移動させ、ブレードホルダ 101を短手方向である ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向における位置を調整して固定することによ つて、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード部材 2のブレード エッジ部 2aの位置を調整し、ブレード部材 2の感光体ドラム 11に対する進入量を調 整することができる。このようにして、ホルダ側位置決め孔 102は、ブレード取付部 29 の基準面に平行な方向であって、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 101に取付けられ る側の端部から感光体ドラム 11に当接される側の端部に向力う方向、すなわちブレ ードホルダ 101の短手方向における位置を規定する。ホルダ側位置決め孔 102は平 行位置規定手段を構成する。 The blade holder 101 includes a holder side positioning hole 102 and a spacer side positioning hole 10. It is fixed to the blade mounting portion 29 by mounting screws 30 such as screw screws passed through 4. By moving the blade holder 101 in the short direction and adjusting and fixing the position in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 which is the short direction, the reference of the blade mounting portion 29 By adjusting the position of the blade edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 in the direction parallel to the surface, the amount of the blade member 2 entering the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted. In this way, the holder-side positioning hole 102 is in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 and comes into contact with the photosensitive drum 11 from the end of the blade member 2 on the side attached to the blade holder 101. The direction in which the blade holder 101 is directed toward the end, that is, the position of the blade holder 101 in the short direction is defined. The holder side positioning hole 102 constitutes a parallel position defining means.
平行位置規定手段としてホルダ側位置決め孔 102を用いる場合、切欠き部 8を用 いる場合と同様にして、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレード ホルダ 101の位置を調整することができる。ホルダ側位置決め孔 102を用いることに よって、切欠き部 8を用いる場合に比べて、ブレードホルダ 101を短手方向において より広範囲に移動させることができるので、ブレードエッジ部 2aをより確実に設定当接 位置 90に配置することができる。本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 100は、実施の 第 1形態と同様の切欠き部 8を有するが、本実施形態では、切欠き部 8は、ハウジン グ 15に設けられる位置決め用の突起部分が挿通可能であり、ホルダ側位置決め孔 1 02によって許容されるブレードホルダ 101の短手方向の移動を阻害しないような形 状および寸法に形成される。  When the holder-side positioning hole 102 is used as the parallel position defining means, the position of the blade holder 101 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted in the same manner as when the notch 8 is used. . By using the holder-side positioning hole 102, the blade holder 101 can be moved in a wider range in the short direction than when using the notch 8, so the blade edge 2a can be set more reliably. Can be placed in contact position 90. The cleaning blade 100 of this embodiment has the same notch 8 as in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, the notch 8 can be inserted with a positioning projection provided on the housing 15. The blade holder 101 is formed in a shape and dimensions that do not hinder the movement of the blade holder 101 in the short direction allowed by the holder-side positioning hole 102.
図 15は、本発明の実施の第 6形態であるクリーニングブレード 110の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す断面図である。図 16は、図 15に示すクリーニングブレード 110の側面図で ある。図 17Aは図 15に示すクリーニングブレード 110の正面図であり、図 17Bは図 1 5に示すクリーニングブレード 110の背面図であり、図 17Cは図 15に示すタリーニン グブレード 110の平面図である。図 15は、クリーニングブレード 110の長手方向に垂 直な仮想平面であって、図 17Aに示すクリーニングブレード 110の切断面線 I—Iを 含む仮想平面における断面図に相当する。図 16は、クリーニングブレード 110の右 側面図に相当する。図 15、図 16および図 17A〜図 17Cでは、理解を容易にするた めに、一部分の厚みを省略して示す。 FIG. 15 is a sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 110 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a side view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 17A is a front view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 17B is a rear view of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. 17C is a plan view of the tiling blade 110 shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a virtual plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the cleaning blade 110, and corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the virtual plane including the cutting plane line II of the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 17A. FIG. 16 corresponds to a right side view of the cleaning blade 110. Figures 15, 16, and 17A-17C are for ease of understanding. For the sake of simplicity, a part of the thickness is omitted.
本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 110は、実施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1と類似し、対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付して説明を省略する。本 実施形態のクリーニングブレード 110において注目すべきは、スぺーサ 4に代えて、 規定部材として突起部分 111が、ブレード支持部材であるブレードホルダ 112に形 成されていることである。  The cleaning blade 110 of this embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. What should be noted in the cleaning blade 110 of the present embodiment is that, instead of the spacer 4, a protruding portion 111 as a defining member is formed in a blade holder 112 which is a blade support member.
突起部分 111は、ブレードホルダ 112となる板状部材に厚み方向一方側に突出す るように穿孔することによってブレードホルダ 112と一体的に形成される。本実施形態 では、突起部分 111は、円筒状に形成される。突起部分 111は、たとえばバーリング 加工によって形成される。バーリング加工によって突起部分 111を形成する場合、た とえば、ブレードホルダ 112となる板状部材に下孔を形成しておき、下孔の開口端部 の板状部材を厚み方向一方側に屈曲させることによって突起部分 111を形成するこ とがでさる。  The protruding portion 111 is integrally formed with the blade holder 112 by punching a plate-like member that becomes the blade holder 112 so as to protrude to one side in the thickness direction. In the present embodiment, the protruding portion 111 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The protruding portion 111 is formed by, for example, burring. When forming the protruding portion 111 by burring, for example, a pilot hole is formed in the plate member that becomes the blade holder 112, and the plate member at the opening end of the pilot hole is bent to one side in the thickness direction. Thus, the protruding portion 111 can be formed.
ブレードホルダ 112は、さらに第 1切欠き部 114および第 2切欠き部 8bを有する。第 1切欠き部 114は、突起部分 111と同様に、たとえばバーリングカ卩ェによって形成さ れる。第 1切欠き部 114は、前述の実施の第 1形態における第 1切欠き部 8aと同様に 形成される。またブレードホルダ 112は、第 1切欠き部 114に連通して、短手方向に 延びる長孔 115を有する。第 1切欠き部 114、第 2切欠き部 8bおよび長孔 115は、平 行位置規定手段を構成し、実施の第 1形態における切欠き部 8と同様にブレード取 付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレードホルダ 112の位置を規定する。 クリーニングブレード 110は、さらにシール部材 113を備える。シール部材 113は、 突起部分 111を囲繞するように、ブレードホルダ 112の突起部分 111が形成される表 面部に設けられる。シール部材 113を設けることによって、後述する図 18に示すカー トリッジ 116において、ブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 112との間にトナーが入り 込むことを防ぐことができる。  The blade holder 112 further has a first notch 114 and a second notch 8b. The first notch 114 is formed by, for example, a burring cage, like the protruding portion 111. First notch 114 is formed in the same manner as first notch 8a in the first embodiment described above. The blade holder 112 has a long hole 115 that communicates with the first notch 114 and extends in the short direction. The first notch 114, the second notch 8b, and the long hole 115 constitute a parallel position defining means, and are provided on the reference surface of the blade mounting part 29 in the same manner as the notch 8 in the first embodiment. The position of the blade holder 112 in the parallel direction is defined. The cleaning blade 110 further includes a seal member 113. The seal member 113 is provided on the surface portion where the protruding portion 111 of the blade holder 112 is formed so as to surround the protruding portion 111. By providing the seal member 113, it is possible to prevent toner from entering between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 112 in the cartridge 116 shown in FIG.
クリーニングブレード 110は、たとえば以下のようにして製造される。ブレードホルダ 112となる板状部材をバーリング加工などによって厚み方向一方側に突出するように 穿孔することによって突起部分 111を形成し、さらに第 1切欠き部 114および第 2切 欠き部 8bを形成してブレードホルダ 112を作製する。次いで、ブレードホルダ 112の 突起部分 111が形成された側の表面部にブレード部材 2を貼付け、ブレードホルダ 1 12の突起部分 111を囲繞するようにシール部材 113を設ける。これによつてタリー- ングブレード 110が得られる。 The cleaning blade 110 is manufactured as follows, for example. A plate-like member that becomes the blade holder 112 is punched so as to protrude to one side in the thickness direction by burring or the like to form a protruding portion 111, and further, the first notch 114 and the second notch The notch 8b is formed to produce the blade holder 112. Next, the blade member 2 is affixed to the surface portion of the blade holder 112 on which the protruding portion 111 is formed, and a seal member 113 is provided so as to surround the protruding portion 111 of the blade holder 112. As a result, a tally blade 110 is obtained.
このように規定部材が突起部分 111としてブレードホルダ 112と一体的に形成され るクリーニングブレード 110は、実施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1のようにスぺ ーサ 4をブレードホルダ 3に係合させる必要がな!、ので、ブレードホルダ 3にスぺーサ 4が係合される場合に比べ、ハウジング 15に対してより容易に取付けることができる。 また突起部分 111は、バーリングカ卩ェなどによって容易に形成することができるので 、クリーニングブレード i 10の製造原価を低減することができる。  As described above, the cleaning blade 110 in which the defining member is integrally formed with the blade holder 112 as the projecting portion 111 engages the spacer 4 with the blade holder 3 like the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary, it can be attached to the housing 15 more easily than when the spacer 4 is engaged with the blade holder 3. Further, since the protruding portion 111 can be easily formed by a burring cage or the like, the manufacturing cost of the cleaning blade i 10 can be reduced.
図 18は、本発明の実施の第 7形態であるカートリッジ 116の構成を簡略ィ匕して示す 断面図である。本実施形態のカートリッジ 116は、実施の第 2形態のカートリッジ 10と 類似し、対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付して説明を省略する。カートリ ッジ 116は、前述の図 15、図 16および図 17A〜図 17Cに示す突起部分 111を有す るクリーニングブレード 110を含むクリーニング装置 117を備える以外は、実施の第 2 形態のカートリッジ 10と同一の構成を有する。  FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cartridge 116 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. The cartridge 116 of the present embodiment is similar to the cartridge 10 of the second embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. The cartridge 116 is the same as the cartridge 10 of the second embodiment except that the cartridge 116 includes the cleaning device 117 including the cleaning blade 110 having the protruding portion 111 shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 17A to 17C. Have the same configuration.
突起部分 111を有するクリーニングブレード 110は、実施の第 1形態のクリーニング ブレード 1と同様に、突起部分 111がブレード取付部 29とブレードホルダ 112との間 に介在されるように取付けられる。突起部分 111によって、ブレード取付部 29の基準 面に垂直な方向におけるブレード部材 2のブレードエッジ部 2aの位置および当接角 Θ 1を調整することができる。  The cleaning blade 110 having the protruding portion 111 is mounted such that the protruding portion 111 is interposed between the blade mounting portion 29 and the blade holder 112, like the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment. The position of the blade edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 and the contact angle Θ1 in the direction perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 can be adjusted by the protruding portion 111.
本実施形態では、突起部分 111の開口端部は、ブレードホルダ 112のブレード部 材 2を支持する表面部分を含む仮想平面に平行になっているが、図 19に示す突起 部分 118のように、ブレードホルダ 112のブレード部材 2を支持する表面部分を含む 仮想平面に対して傾斜するように形成されてもよい。このように突起部分 118の開口 端部をブレードホルダ 112のブレード部材 2を支持する表面部分を含む仮想平面に 対して傾斜させることによって、より詳細には突起部分 118の開口端部を、ブレード 部材 2に近づくにつれてブレードホルダ 112から離反またはブレードホルダ 112に近 接するように形成することによって、前述の図 5に示す傾斜したスぺーサ 31を用いる 場合と同様に、当接角 Θ 1を容易に設定当接角度に調整することができる。より詳細 には、当接角 θ 1は、ブレードホルダ 112のブレード部材 2を支持する表面部分を含 む仮想平面に対する突起部分 118の開口端部の傾斜角度 Θ 3によって調整すること 力 Sできる。図 19では、突起部分 118の開口端部がブレード部材 2に近づくにつれて ブレードホルダ 112から離反するように形成される場合を示す。 In this embodiment, the open end of the protruding portion 111 is parallel to a virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112, but like the protruding portion 118 shown in FIG. The blade holder 112 may be formed so as to be inclined with respect to an imaginary plane including a surface portion that supports the blade member 2. In this way, the opening end portion of the projecting portion 118 is inclined with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion supporting the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112, and more specifically, the opening end portion of the projecting portion 118 is formed into the blade member. As the position approaches 2, the blade holder 112 moves away from or closer to the blade holder 112. By forming so as to be in contact with each other, the contact angle Θ 1 can be easily adjusted to the set contact angle as in the case of using the inclined spacer 31 shown in FIG. More specifically, the contact angle θ 1 can be adjusted by the inclination angle θ 3 of the opening end portion of the protruding portion 118 with respect to the virtual plane including the surface portion that supports the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112. FIG. 19 shows a case where the opening end portion of the protruding portion 118 is formed so as to be separated from the blade holder 112 as it approaches the blade member 2.
開口端部が傾斜している突起部分 118は、たとえば、前述の図 15に示す突起部分 111と同様にブレードホルダ 112となる板状部材に形成された下孔に、板状部材の 厚み方向他方側からパンチを挿入して板状部材を厚み方向一方側に屈曲させた後 、形成された突起部分の開口端部に、先にパンチを挿入した側と反対側すなわち板 状部材の厚み方向一方側から、傾斜したパンチを押し当てることによって形成するこ とがでさる。  The protruding portion 118 whose opening end portion is inclined is formed in, for example, a pilot hole formed in the plate-like member serving as the blade holder 112 similarly to the protruding portion 111 shown in FIG. After inserting the punch from the side and bending the plate-like member to one side in the thickness direction, at the opening end of the formed projection part, the side opposite to the side where the punch was previously inserted, that is, one in the thickness direction of the plate-like member It can be formed by pressing an inclined punch from the side.
本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 110は、実施の第 1形態のクリーニングブレード 1と同様にしてブレード取付部 29に取付けられる。クリーニングブレード 110の取付 けは、前述の図 13に示す実施の第 4形態によるクリーニングブレードの取付けと同様 にして行なわれる。本実施形態では、図 13に示すステップ siにおいて、複数のスぺ ーサに代えて、前述の図 15に示す突起部分 111および図 19に示す突起部分 118 のように、突起部分の高さおよび、突起部分の端面とブレードホルダ 112のブレード 部材 2を支持する表面部分を含む仮想平面との成す角度である傾斜角度 Θ 3の異な る複数のクリーニングブレードを準備する。準備したクリーニングブレードから、スぺー サの選択と同様にして、ブレード部材 2と感光体ドラム 11との当接角 θ 1が設定当接 角度になるとともに、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード部 材 2の位置が予め定める位置になるように、クリーニングブレードを選択する。選択さ れたクリーニングブレードをブレード取付部 29に仮固定し、ステップ s2に進む。ステツ プ s2以降のステップは、前述の実施の第 4形態によるクリーニングブレード 1の取付 けと同様に行なわれる。  The cleaning blade 110 of the present embodiment is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 in the same manner as the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment. The cleaning blade 110 is attached in the same manner as the cleaning blade according to the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, in step si shown in FIG. 13, instead of the plurality of spacers, the height of the protruding portion and the protruding portion 111 shown in FIG. 15 and the protruding portion 118 shown in FIG. A plurality of cleaning blades having different inclination angles Θ 3, which are angles formed between the end surface of the protruding portion and a virtual plane including the surface portion supporting the blade member 2 of the blade holder 112, are prepared. From the prepared cleaning blade, the contact angle θ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 becomes the set contact angle and is perpendicular to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 in the same manner as the selection of the spacer. The cleaning blade is selected so that the position of the blade member 2 in the direction is a predetermined position. Temporarily fix the selected cleaning blade to the blade mounting portion 29, and proceed to step s2. The steps after step s2 are performed in the same manner as the mounting of the cleaning blade 1 according to the fourth embodiment described above.
このように本実施形態では、突起部分の高さおよび傾斜角度 Θ 3によって、ブレー ド取付部 29の基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置および姿勢 を調整し、さらに第 1切欠き部 114、第 2切欠き部 8bおよび長孔 115を用いてブレー ド取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置を調整してク リー-ングブレードをカートリッジに取付けるので、ブレード部材 2を感光体ドラム 11 からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置である設定当接位置 90に精度良く取 付けることができる。 As described above, in the present embodiment, the position and posture of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction perpendicular to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 are determined by the height of the protruding portion and the inclination angle Θ3. And adjust the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 using the first cutout portion 114, the second cutout portion 8b, and the long hole 115 to clean the blade. Since the blade member is attached to the cartridge, the blade member 2 can be accurately attached to the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it.
本実施形態では、第 1切欠き部 114、第 2切欠き部 8bおよび長孔 115を用いてブレ 一ド取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置を調整す る力 調整方法はこれに限定されない。たとえば、前述の図 14に示すクリーニングブ レード 100のように、長孔であるホルダ側位置決め孔 102を形成し、ブレードホルダ を短手方向に移動させ、ブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向における位置を 調整して固定することによって調整してもよい。これによつて、ブレード取付部 29の基 準面に平行な方向におけるブレードエッジ部 2aの位置をより容易に調整することが できる。  In the present embodiment, the force for adjusting the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 using the first notch portion 114, the second notch portion 8b, and the elongated hole 115. The adjustment method is not limited to this. For example, as in the cleaning blade 100 shown in FIG. 14 described above, a holder-side positioning hole 102 that is a long hole is formed, the blade holder is moved in the short direction, and the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29 is formed. It may be adjusted by adjusting and fixing the position at. Thereby, the position of the blade edge portion 2a in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade attachment portion 29 can be adjusted more easily.
図 20は、本発明の実施の第 8形態であるクリーニングブレード 120の構成を簡略ィ匕 して示す断面図である。本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 120は、実施の第 1形態 のクリーニングブレード 1と類似し、対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付し て説明を省略する。図 20では、クリーニングブレード 120をブレード取付部 29に取付 用ねじ 30で取付けた状態を示す。また図 20では、図 1に示すスぺーサ 4の係合部 9 は、図面が錯綜して理解が困難になるので記載を省略する。  FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the cleaning blade 120 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The cleaning blade 120 of this embodiment is similar to the cleaning blade 1 of the first embodiment, and corresponding portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. FIG. 20 shows a state where the cleaning blade 120 is attached to the blade attachment portion 29 with the attachment screw 30. Also, in FIG. 20, the engaging portion 9 of the spacer 4 shown in FIG. 1 is omitted because the drawing is complicated and difficult to understand.
本実施形態のクリーニングブレード 120において注目すべきは、 2つの傾き調整用 ねじ孑し 121a, 121bと、 2つの傾さ調整用ねじ 122a, 122bとを有することである。 2 つの傾き調整用ねじ孔 121a, 121bおよび 2つの傾き調整用ねじ 122a, 122bは、 姿勢調整手段 125を構成する。  What should be noted in the cleaning blade 120 of this embodiment is that it has two tilt adjusting screwdrivers 121a and 121b and two tilt adjusting screws 122a and 122b. The two inclination adjusting screw holes 121a and 121b and the two inclination adjusting screws 122a and 122b constitute a posture adjusting means 125.
2つの傾き調整用ねじ孔 121a, 121bは、ブレードホルダ 3の短手方向におけるホ ルダ側ねじ孔 3aの開口端部の両側に形成される第 1傾き調整用ねじ孔 121aおよび 第 2傾き調整用ねじ孔 121bを含む。第 1傾き調整用ねじ孔 121aは、ブレードホルダ 3に設けられる調整用ホルダねじ孔 124aとナット部 123aのねじ孔とによって形成さ れる。同様に、第 2傾き調整用ねじ孔 121bは、ブレードホルダ 3に設けられる調整用 ホルダねじ孔 124bとナット部 123bのねじ孔とによって形成される。ナット部 123a, 1 23bのねじ孔は、たとえばタップカ卩ェなどによってブレードホルダ 3のナット部 123a, 123bに形成される。傾き調整用ねじ 122a, 122bは、たとえばビスねじである。 姿勢調整手段 125は、第 1傾き調整用ねじ孔 121aに螺合される第 1傾き調整用ね じ 122aのブレードホルダ 3からブレード取付部 29側に突出する部分の長さ(以後、「 第 1ねじ突出長さ」と称する) dl、および第 2傾き調整用ねじ孔 121bに螺合される第 2傾き調整用ねじ 122bのブレードホルダ 3からブレード取付部 29側に突出する部分 の長さ(以後、「第 2ねじ突出長さ」と称する) d2をそれぞれ調整することによって、ブ レードホルダ 3の姿勢を調整することができる。たとえば、図 20に示すように第 1ねじ 突出長さ dlと第 2ねじ突出長さ d2とが略等しぐブレードホルダ 3の厚み方向一方側 の表面がブレード取付部 29の基準面に略平行である状態から、第 2傾き調整用ねじ 122bをねじ込み、第 1ねじ突出長さ dlよりも第 2ねじ突出長さ d2を長くすると、ブレ ードホルダ 3が矢符 126方向に弾性変形するので、ブレードホルダ 3の厚み方向一 方側の表面をブレード取付部 29の基準面に対して傾斜させることができる。これによ つて、ブレード部材 2と感光体ドラム 11との当接角 θ 1を調整することができる。 The two tilt adjustment screw holes 121a and 121b are the first tilt adjustment screw hole 121a and the second tilt adjustment screw hole formed on both sides of the opening end of the holder side screw hole 3a in the short direction of the blade holder 3. Includes screw holes 121b. The first inclination adjusting screw hole 121a is formed by an adjusting holder screw hole 124a provided in the blade holder 3 and a screw hole of the nut portion 123a. Similarly, the second inclination adjusting screw hole 121b is provided for adjusting the blade holder 3. The holder screw hole 124b and the screw hole of the nut portion 123b are formed. The screw holes of the nut portions 123a and 123b are formed in the nut portions 123a and 123b of the blade holder 3 by, for example, a tap carriage. The inclination adjusting screws 122a and 122b are, for example, screw screws. The posture adjusting means 125 is a length of a portion of the first inclination adjusting screw 122a that is screwed into the first inclination adjusting screw hole 121a and protruding from the blade holder 3 to the blade mounting portion 29 side (hereinafter referred to as “first Dl) and the length of the portion of the second inclination adjusting screw 122b that is screwed into the second inclination adjusting screw hole 121b from the blade holder 3 to the blade mounting portion 29 side (hereinafter referred to as “screw protruding length”). The posture of the blade holder 3 can be adjusted by adjusting d2 respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 20, the surface of one side in the thickness direction of the blade holder 3 where the first screw protrusion length dl and the second screw protrusion length d2 are substantially equal is substantially parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. When the second inclination adjusting screw 122b is screwed in and the second screw protruding length d2 is longer than the first screw protruding length dl, the blade holder 3 is elastically deformed in the direction of the arrow 126. The surface on the one side in the thickness direction of the holder 3 can be inclined with respect to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion 29. Thereby, the contact angle θ 1 between the blade member 2 and the photosensitive drum 11 can be adjusted.
このように本実施形態では、姿勢調整手段 125によってブレードホルダ 3を矢符 12 6方向に弾性変形させ、ブレードホルダ 3の姿勢を調整することができるので、ブレー ド部材 2と感光体ドラム 11との当接角 θ 1をより確実に設定当接角度に調整すること ができる。したがって、姿勢調整手段 125を有しない場合に比べて、ブレード部材 2 を感光体ドラム 11からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置である設定当接位 置 90により精度良く取付けることができる。  As described above, in the present embodiment, the blade holder 3 can be elastically deformed in the direction of the arrow 126 by the posture adjusting means 125 and the posture of the blade holder 3 can be adjusted. The contact angle θ 1 can be adjusted to the set contact angle more reliably. Therefore, as compared with the case where the posture adjusting means 125 is not provided, the blade member 2 can be attached with higher accuracy by the set contact position 90 which is a position suitable for removing the toner from the photosensitive drum 11 and cleaning it. .
本実施形態では、スぺーサは、一様な厚みに形成されるスぺーサ 4であるけれども 、これに限定されず、前述の図 5に示すように取付側表面がホルダ側表面に対して 傾斜するスぺーサ 31であってもよ 、。このように取付側表面がホルダ側表面に対して 傾斜するスぺーサ 31を用いる場合に、さらに姿勢調整手段 125を備えることによって 、当接角 Θ 1を一層確実に設定当接角度に調整することができるので、ブレード部材 2の取付精度を一層向上させることができる。  In the present embodiment, the spacer is the spacer 4 formed to have a uniform thickness, but is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Even an inclined spacer 31. In this way, when using the spacer 31 whose mounting side surface is inclined with respect to the holder side surface, the contact angle Θ 1 is more reliably adjusted to the set contact angle by further providing the posture adjusting means 125. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member 2 can be further improved.
実施例 [実施例 I] Example [Example I]
(実施例 1)  (Example 1)
表面処理鋼板力 成るブレードホルダ 3、熱硬化型ポリウレタン力 成るブレード部 材 2および ABS榭脂から成るスぺーサ 4を用い、前述の図 1に示すクリーニングブレ ード 1を製造した。得られたタリ一ユングブレード 1を用 V、てカートリッジを製造した。  Using the blade holder 3 made of surface-treated steel, the blade part 2 made of thermosetting polyurethane, and the spacer 4 made of ABS resin, the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 was manufactured. A cartridge was manufactured by using the obtained talung blade 1.
(実施例 2)  (Example 2)
表面処理鋼板力 成るブレードホルダ 112および熱硬化型ポリウレタン力 成るブ レード部材 2を用い、前述の図 15に示すクリーニングブレード 110を製造した。得ら れたクリーニングブレード 110を用いてカートリッジを製造した。  Using the blade holder 112 made of surface-treated steel plate force and the blade member 2 made of thermosetting polyurethane force, the cleaning blade 110 shown in FIG. 15 was manufactured. A cartridge was manufactured using the resulting cleaning blade 110.
(比較例 1)  (Comparative Example 1)
前述の図 25に示す従来技術によるクリーニングブレード 140を用いて、カートリッジ を製造した。ブレード支持部材 141には表面処理鋼板力も成るブレードホルダを用 い、ブレード部材 142には熱硬化型ポリウレタン力も成るブレード部材を用いた。  A cartridge was manufactured using the cleaning blade 140 according to the prior art shown in FIG. A blade holder having a surface-treated steel plate force was used as the blade support member 141, and a blade member having a thermosetting polyurethane force was used as the blade member 142.
(参考例 1)  (Reference Example 1)
前述の図 24に示す金型一体成形タイプのクリーニングブレード 130を用いて、カー トリッジを製造した。ブレード支持部材 131には表面処理鋼板力も成るブレードホル ダを用い、ブレード部材 132は熱硬化型ポリウレタンで形成した。  A cartridge was manufactured using the mold-integrated type cleaning blade 130 shown in FIG. A blade holder having a surface-treated steel plate force was used as the blade support member 131, and the blade member 132 was formed of thermosetting polyurethane.
〔評価 1〕  [Evaluation 1]
実施例 1, 2、比較例 1および参考例 1で得られたカートリッジについて、累積誤差を 評価した。評価結果を表 1に示す。表 1に示す参考例 1の累積誤差は、金型製作誤 差とブレード部材を形成する熱硬化型ポリウレタンの成型収縮率のばらつきによるも のである。  The cumulative errors of the cartridges obtained in Examples 1 and 2, Comparative Example 1 and Reference Example 1 were evaluated. Table 1 shows the evaluation results. The cumulative error in Reference Example 1 shown in Table 1 is due to the mold manufacturing error and the variation in mold shrinkage of the thermosetting polyurethane that forms the blade member.
[表 1] 実施例 1 実施例 2 比較例 1 参考例 1 累 ¾¾i 要素 [table 1] Example 1 Example 2 Comparative example 1 Reference example 1 Cumulative ¾¾i element
スへ。 -サ方式 八'- -リンゲ方式 (従来技術) (一体成形)  To -Service method 8'--Ringe method (conventional technology) (Integrated molding)
1 ブレード厚み —— 0.1 一 1 Blade thickness —— 0.1
2 接着層厚み 土 0.02 上 0.02 土 0.02 一2 Adhesive layer thickness Soil 0.02 Top 0.02 Soil 0.02
3 ホルダ厚み ― ― 土 0.04 一3 Holder thickness ― ― Soil 0.04
4 ホルダ段差 ― ― 土 0.1 一4 Holder step--Soil 0.1
5 ホルダ段差平行度 ― ― 0.1 一5 Holder parallelism--0.1
6 フ'レートの倒れ 土 0.1 ± 0.1 土 0.1 ―6 'Fall's fallen soil 0.1 ± 0.1 soil 0.1-
7 スへ サ厚み 0.03 ― ― 一7 thickness 0.03 ― ― One
8 八'-リンゲ高さ ― 土 0.02 ― ― 累積誤差計 ± 0.10 0.10 0.20 土 0.07 8 8'-Ringe height ― Sat 0.02 ― ― Cumulative error meter ± 0.10 0.10 0.20 Sat 0.07
単 lii 、mm) 表 1に示すように、実施例 1および 2のカートリッジは、参考例 1の金型一体成形タイ プのクリーニングブレード 130を用いたカートリッジと同程度の累積誤差であり、比較 例 1の従来技術によるクリーニングブレード 140を用いたカートリッジに比べ、累積誤 差が小さぐ取付精度に優れることが判る。  (Single lii, mm) As shown in Table 1, the cartridges of Examples 1 and 2 have the same cumulative error as the cartridge using the cleaning blade 130 of the mold-integrated molding type of Reference Example 1, and are comparative examples. Compared with the cartridge using the cleaning blade 140 of the prior art 1), it can be seen that the cumulative error is small and the mounting accuracy is excellent.
[実施例 Π]  [Example Π]
(実施例 3)  (Example 3)
前述の図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1を準備し、スぺーサ 4によってブレードホル ダ 3の姿勢およびブレードホルダ 3とブレード取付部 29との間隔を調整した後、前述 の図 6〜図 9に示す位置決め装置 40を用いてブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な 方向におけるクリーニングブレード 1の位置を調整することによって位置決めして、ク リー-ングブレード 1をハウジング 15のブレード取付部 29に取付け、前述の図 4に示 すカートリッジ 10を得た。  After preparing the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 and adjusting the position of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 by the spacer 4, the above-described cleaning is performed as shown in FIGS. Position the cleaning blade 1 by adjusting the position of the cleaning blade 1 in the direction parallel to the reference plane of the blade mounting portion 29 using the positioning device 40, and attach the cleaning blade 1 to the blade mounting portion 29 of the housing 15. The cartridge 10 shown in Fig. 4 was obtained.
(比較例 2)  (Comparative Example 2)
実施例 3と同様のクリーニングブレード 1を準備し、スぺーサ 4によってブレードホル ダ 3の姿勢およびブレードホルダ 3とブレード取付部 29との間隔を調整した後、位置 決め装置 40によるブレード取付部 29の基準面に平行な方向におけるクリーニングブ レード 1の位置の調整を行なわずにクリーニングブレード 1をブレード取付部 29に取 付ける以外は、実施例 3と同様にしてカートリッジを得た。  A cleaning blade 1 similar to that in Example 3 is prepared, and after adjusting the posture of the blade holder 3 and the distance between the blade holder 3 and the blade mounting portion 29 by the spacer 4, the blade mounting portion 29 by the positioning device 40 is adjusted. A cartridge was obtained in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the cleaning blade 1 was attached to the blade mounting portion 29 without adjusting the position of the cleaning blade 1 in the direction parallel to the reference plane.
〔評価 2〕  [Evaluation 2]
実施例 3および比較例 2で得たカートリッジをそれぞれ市販のレーザビームプリンタ に装着し、サンプル画像を記録用紙 30, 000枚に連続して形成させる印字試験を行 なった。トナーには、重合法によって製造された体積平均粒径 5. 8 mのトナーを用 いた。記録用紙に形成された画像を目視によって観察し、黒筋などの画像不良が発 生しているカゝ否かを判断した。比較例 2のカートリッジを用いた場合には、記録用紙 1 0, 000枚に印字した時点で画像不良が発生したので、その時点で印字試験を終了 させた。 Commercially available laser beam printers for the cartridges obtained in Example 3 and Comparative Example 2 A print test was conducted in which sample images were continuously formed on 30,000 sheets of recording paper. As the toner, a toner having a volume average particle diameter of 5.8 m manufactured by a polymerization method was used. The image formed on the recording paper was visually observed to determine whether an image defect such as black streak occurred. When the cartridge of Comparative Example 2 was used, an image defect occurred when printing on 10,000 sheets of recording paper, and the printing test was terminated at that point.
印字試験後、クリーニングブレードと感光体ドラムとの接触位置を目視によって観察 し、クリーニングブレードのどの部分が感光体ドラムに接触しているかを評価した。ま たクリーニングブレードを取出し、光学顕微鏡によって 175倍に拡大し、図 21に示す ブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aおよび厚み方向一方側の表面部のうち感光体ドラムに 近い側の表面部 (以後、ドラム側表面部と称する) 2bを観察した。観察結果から、トナ 一がブレード部材 2のエッジ部 2aをすり抜けて、ブレード部材 2の感光体ドラムに近 V、側の表面部 2bに付着する、 V、わゆるトナーすり抜け現象が発生して 、るか否かを 判断した。  After the printing test, the contact position between the cleaning blade and the photosensitive drum was visually observed to evaluate which part of the cleaning blade was in contact with the photosensitive drum. The cleaning blade was taken out and magnified 175 times with an optical microscope, and the edge portion 2a of blade member 2 and the surface portion on one side in the thickness direction shown in FIG. 2b was observed. From the observation results, the toner 1 slips through the edge 2a of the blade member 2 and comes close to the photosensitive drum of the blade member 2 V and adheres to the surface portion 2b of the side V. Judged whether or not.
以上の評価結果を表 2に示す。  The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
[表 2] [Table 2]
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
表 2に示すように、位置決め装置を使用してクリーニングブレードを取付けた実施例 3のカートリッジでは、記録用紙 30, 000枚に印字させても画像不良は発生しなかつ た。これに対し、位置決め装置を使用せずにクリーニングブレードを取付けた比較例 2のカートリッジでは、記録用紙 10, 000枚に印字させた時点で、記録用紙の送り方 向に延びる縦筋線が発生した。 また実施例 3のクリーニングブレードは、図 22Aに示すように、ブレード部材 2へのト ナーすり抜け現象は発生していな力つた。これに対し、比較例 2のクリーニングブレー ドではトナーすり抜け現象が発生し、図 22Bに示すように、ブレード部材 2のドラム側 表面部 2bに、参照符 129で示されるようにトナーが付着した部分があった。 As shown in Table 2, with the cartridge of Example 3 in which the cleaning blade was attached using the positioning device, no image defect occurred even when printing on 30,000 sheets of recording paper. On the other hand, in the cartridge of Comparative Example 2 in which the cleaning blade was attached without using the positioning device, vertical streak lines extending in the recording paper feeding direction occurred when printing on 10,000 recording sheets. . Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the cleaning blade of Example 3 was strong without causing the toner slipping phenomenon to the blade member 2. On the other hand, in the cleaning blade of Comparative Example 2, a toner slip phenomenon occurred, and as shown in FIG. 22B, the portion where the toner adhered to the drum-side surface portion 2b of the blade member 2 as indicated by reference numeral 129 was there.
また実施例 3のクリーニングブレードは、図 23Aの斜線部分で示されるように、ブレ 一ド部材 2のエッジ部 2aが感光体ドラムに接触しており、適正位置に取付けられて ヽ ることが判った。これに対し、比較例 2のクリーニングブレードは、図 23Bの斜線部分 で示されるように、ブレード部材 2のドラム側表面部 2bが感光体ドラム 11に接触した 腹当り状態になっていることが判った。  In addition, as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 23A, the cleaning blade of Example 3 shows that the edge portion 2a of the blade member 2 is in contact with the photosensitive drum and can be attached at an appropriate position. It was. In contrast, the cleaning blade of Comparative Example 2 was found to be in the abutting state where the drum-side surface portion 2b of the blade member 2 was in contact with the photosensitive drum 11, as indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 23B. It was.
[実施例 ΠΙ]  [Example ΠΙ]
以下では、前述の図 1に示すクリーニングブレード 1において、ブレード部材 2とブレ ードホルダ 3とを接着する接着剤の種類、ならびにブレードホルダ 3へのプライマ処理 の有無およびプライマ処理の種類を変化させて、ブレード部材 2とブレードホルダ 3と の接着力を評価した。  Hereinafter, in the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 described above, the type of adhesive for bonding the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3, the presence / absence of the primer treatment to the blade holder 3 and the type of primer treatment are changed. The adhesive strength between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
(試験例 1)  (Test Example 1)
表面処理鋼板力 成るブレードホルダ 3、熱硬化型ポリウレタン力 成るブレード部 材 2および ABS榭脂から成るスぺーサ 4を用い、前述の図 1に示すクリーニングブレ ード 1を製造した。ブレード部材 2とブレードホルダ 3との接着剤としては、 EVA系ホッ トメルト接着剤と PA系ホットメルト接着剤との混合物を用いた。  Using the blade holder 3 made of surface-treated steel, the blade part 2 made of thermosetting polyurethane, and the spacer 4 made of ABS resin, the cleaning blade 1 shown in FIG. 1 was manufactured. As an adhesive between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3, a mixture of an EVA hot melt adhesive and a PA hot melt adhesive was used.
(試験例 2)  (Test Example 2)
接着剤として、 EVA系ホットメルト接着剤と PA系ホットメルト接着剤との混合物に代 えて、 PUR系ホットメルト接着剤を用いる以外は、試験例 1と同様にして、タリーニン グブレード 1を製造した。  A tiling blade 1 was produced in the same manner as in Test Example 1 except that a PUR hot melt adhesive was used instead of a mixture of an EVA hot melt adhesive and a PA hot melt adhesive.
(試験例 3)  (Test Example 3)
ブレードホルダ 3のブレード部材 2が貼付けられる側の表面部に、フエノール系プラ イマを塗布するプライマ処理 (以後、プライマ処理 Aと称する)を施した後にブレード 部材 2を貼付ける以外は、試験例 1と同様にして、クリーニングブレード 1を製造した。 プライマはデイツビングによって塗布した。 (試験例 4) Test Example 1 except that the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side to which the blade member 2 is attached is subjected to a primer treatment (hereinafter referred to as “primer treatment A”) that applies a phenolic primer and then the blade member 2 is attached. A cleaning blade 1 was produced in the same manner as described above. The primer was applied by datebing. (Test Example 4)
ブレードホルダ 3のブレード部材 2が貼付けられる側の表面部に、シランカップリン グ剤系プライマを塗布するプライマ処理 (以後、プライマ処理 Bと称する)を施した後 にブレード部材 2を貼付ける以外は、試験例 1と同様にして、クリーニングブレード 1を 製造した。プライマはデイツビングによって塗布した。  Except for applying the silane coupling agent primer on the surface of the blade holder 3 on the side where the blade member 2 is attached (hereinafter referred to as primer treatment B), and then attaching the blade member 2 A cleaning blade 1 was produced in the same manner as in Test Example 1. The primer was applied by datebing.
〔評価 3〕  [Evaluation 3]
試験例 1〜4で得られた各クリーニングブレードについて、以下のようにして(a) 90 ° ピーリング試験、(b)高温高湿 (略称 HH)圧接剥離試験、(c)低温低湿 (略称 LL) 圧接剥離試験、 (d) HH連続ランニング試験および (e)長期保管試験を行なった。  For each of the cleaning blades obtained in Test Examples 1 to 4, (a) 90 ° peeling test, (b) high temperature and high humidity (abbreviation HH) pressure peel test, (c) low temperature and low humidity (abbreviation LL) The pressure peel test, (d) HH continuous running test, and (e) long-term storage test were performed.
(a) 90° ピーリング試験  (a) 90 ° peeling test
90° ピーリング試験は、 日本工業規格 (略称 JIS) K6854— 1に準じ、ブレード部材 2に対して、接着面に垂直な方向であって図 1に示すブレード部材 2からブレードホ ルダ 3に向力う方向である矢符 150方向に力をカ卩え、剥離速度 500mmZ分で、ブレ 一ド部材 2の平均剥離力を測定した。  The 90 ° peeling test conforms to the Japanese Industrial Standard (abbreviated as JIS) K6854-1 and is directed to the blade holder 2 from the blade member 2 shown in FIG. The force was applied in the direction indicated by arrow 150, and the average peel force of blade member 2 was measured at a peel speed of 500 mmZ.
(b) HH圧接剥離試験  (b) HH pressure peel test
温度 45°C、相対湿度 85%の高温高湿(HH)環境下において、図 1に示すブレー ド部材 2を矢符 150方向に向かって、ブレードホルダ 3のブレード部材 2が貼り付けら れる側の表面を含む仮想平面とブレードエッジ部 2aとの間隔 δが 1. 7mmになるよう に屈曲させた状態で、 3ヶ月間放置した。放置後、ブレード部材 2を目視によって観 察し、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3への接着状態を評価した。  The blade member 2 side of the blade holder 3 is attached to the blade member 2 in the direction of arrow 150 in a high temperature and high humidity (HH) environment at a temperature of 45 ° C and a relative humidity of 85%. The plate was left for 3 months in a bent state so that the distance δ between the virtual plane including the surface of the blade and the blade edge portion 2a was 1.7 mm. After leaving, the blade member 2 was visually observed, and the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
(c) LL圧接剥離試験  (c) LL pressure peel test
温度 5°C、相対湿度 15%の低温低湿 (LL)環境下において、 HH圧接剥離試験と 同様にブレード部材 2を屈曲させた状態で 3ヶ月間放置した後、ブレード部材 2を目 視によって観察し、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3への接着状態を評価した。  In a low-temperature and low-humidity (LL) environment at a temperature of 5 ° C and a relative humidity of 15%, after leaving the blade member 2 bent for 3 months in the same manner as the HH pressure contact peeling test, visually observe the blade member 2. Then, the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
(d) HH連続ランニング試験  (d) HH continuous running test
試験例 1〜4で得られたクリーニングブレードをそれぞれカートリッジに取付け、得ら れたカートリッジを市販のレーザビームプリンタに装着し、温度 32. 5°C、相対湿度 85 %の高温高湿環境下において、サンプル画像を記録用紙 10, 000枚に連続して形 成させる印字試験を行なった。印字試験後、クリーニングブレードを取出して目視に よって観察し、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3への接着状態を評価した。 Attach the cleaning blade obtained in Test Examples 1 to 4 to a cartridge, and attach the obtained cartridge to a commercially available laser beam printer in a high temperature and high humidity environment with a temperature of 32.5 ° C and a relative humidity of 85%. , Continuously form sample images on 10,000 sheets of recording paper A printing test was performed. After the printing test, the cleaning blade was taken out and visually observed to evaluate the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3.
(e)長期保管試験  (e) Long-term storage test
試験例 1〜4で得られたクリーニングブレードをそれぞれカートリッジに取付け、得ら れたカートリッジを温度 45°Cの乾熱環境下に 6ヶ月間保管した後、市販のレーザビー ムプリンタに装着し、サンプル画像を記録用紙 10, 000枚に連続して形成させる印 字試験を行なった。印字試験後、クリーニングブレードを取出して目視によって観察 し、ブレード部材 2のブレードホルダ 3への接着状態を評価した。  The cleaning blades obtained in Test Examples 1 to 4 were each attached to the cartridge, and the obtained cartridge was stored in a dry heat environment at a temperature of 45 ° C for 6 months, and then attached to a commercially available laser beam printer, and a sample was obtained. A print test was performed in which images were continuously formed on 10,000 sheets of recording paper. After the printing test, the cleaning blade was taken out and visually observed, and the adhesion state of the blade member 2 to the blade holder 3 was evaluated.
以上の(a)〜(e)の評価結果を表 3に示す。  Table 3 shows the evaluation results of (a) to (e) above.
[表 3] [Table 3]
Figure imgf000051_0001
試験例 1と試験例 2との比較から、 PUR系ホットメルト接着剤を用いることによって、 EVA系ホットメルト接着剤と PA系ホットメルト接着剤との混合物を用いる場合に比べ て、ブレード部材 2の短手方向におけるエッジ部 2aと反対側の端部である基端部の 剥離が抑えられることが判る。また試験例 2と試験例 3, 4との比較から、ブレードホル ダ 3にプライマ処理を施すことによって、ブレード部材 2とブレードホルダ 3との接着力 力 S向上されることが半 IJる。
Figure imgf000051_0001
Comparison between Test Example 1 and Test Example 2 shows that the use of PUR-based hot melt adhesive compared to the blade member 2 compared to the case of using a mixture of EVA-based hot melt adhesive and PA-based hot melt adhesive. It can be seen that peeling of the base end, which is the end opposite to the edge 2a in the short direction, can be suppressed. Further, from comparison between Test Example 2 and Test Examples 3 and 4, it can be said that by applying primer treatment to the blade holder 3, the adhesive force S between the blade member 2 and the blade holder 3 is improved.
本発明は、その精神または主要な特徴力 逸脱することなぐ他のいろいろな形態 で実施できる。したがって、前述の実施形態はあらゆる点で単なる例示に過ぎず、本 発明の範囲は特許請求の範囲に示すものであって、明細書本文には何ら拘束され ない。さらに、特許請求の範囲に属する変形や変更は全て本発明の範囲内のもので ある。 The present invention can be implemented in various other forms without departing from the spirit or main characteristic power thereof. Therefore, the above-described embodiment is merely an example in all respects, and the scope of the present invention is shown in the claims, and is not restricted by the text of the specification. Further, all modifications and changes belonging to the claims are within the scope of the present invention. is there.
産業上の利用可能性 Industrial applicability
本発明によれば、ブレード支持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が貼付け られた従来のクリーニングブレードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対する誤差 の影響を少なくすることができる。したがって、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを 除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良ぐまた容易に取付けることができる。ま た特に小粒径トナーが用いられる場合に、トナーすり抜け現象を防止し、画質の低下 を防ぐことができる。  According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the influence of an error on the attachment position of the blade member as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. Therefore, the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. In particular, when a small particle size toner is used, it is possible to prevent the toner slipping phenomenon and to prevent the image quality from deteriorating.
本発明によれば、規定部材を所望の形状に精度良く形成することができるので、ブ レード部材の取付精度を向上させることができる。  According to the present invention, since the defining member can be accurately formed in a desired shape, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be improved.
本発明によれば、規定部材であるスぺーサによってブレード支持部材をブレード取 付部に対して傾斜させて取付けることができるので、ブレード支持部材の姿勢をより 精度良く規定することができる。したがって、ブレード部材の取付精度をさらに向上さ せることができる。  According to the present invention, the blade support member can be inclined and attached to the blade mounting portion by the spacer that is the defining member, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
本発明によれば、規定部材は、ブレード支持部材と一体的に形成される突起部分 であるので、ブレード取付部に対してクリーニングブレードをより容易に取付けること ができる。また規定部材をより容易に形成することができるので、クリーニングブレード の製造原価を低減することができる。  According to the present invention, since the defining member is a protruding portion formed integrally with the blade support member, the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attaching portion. Further, since the defining member can be formed more easily, the manufacturing cost of the cleaning blade can be reduced.
本発明によれば、規定部材である突起部分によってブレード支持部材をブレード 取付部に対して傾斜させて取付けることができるので、ブレード支持部材の姿勢をよ り精度良く規定することができる。したがって、ブレード部材を一層精度良く取付ける ことができる。  According to the present invention, the blade support member can be inclined and attached to the blade attachment portion by the projecting portion which is the defining member, so that the posture of the blade support member can be defined with higher accuracy. Therefore, the blade member can be attached with higher accuracy.
本発明によれば、ブレード取付部に取付けるときに姿勢調整手段によってブレード 支持部材の姿勢をより確実に予め定める姿勢に調整することができるので、ブレード 部材の取付精度を一層向上させることができる。  According to the present invention, since the posture of the blade support member can be more reliably adjusted to a predetermined posture by the posture adjusting means when attached to the blade attachment portion, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
本発明によれば、ブレード取付部の基準面に平行な方向であって、ブレード部材 のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側の端部力 像担持体に当接される側の端部に 向かう方向におけるブレード支持部材の位置を平行位置規定手段によって規定する ことができるので、ブレード部材の取付精度をより一層向上させることができる。 本発明によれば、ブレード支持部材のカートリッジのブレード取付部に臨む側にブ レード部材とスぺーサとを備え、スぺーサをブレード取付部とブレード支持部材との 間に介在させることによってブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持部材とブレ 一ド取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を規定することのできるタリー二 ングブレードを得ることができる。したがって、スぺーサによってブレード部材の像担 持体に対する位置および姿勢を規定することができるので、ブレード部材を像担持 体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良く取付けることができる。 本発明によれば、ブレード支持部材のカートリッジの取付部に臨む側にブレード部 材を備えるとともに突起部分を有し、突起部分をブレード取付部とブレード支持部材 との間に介在させることによってブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持部材と ブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を規定することのできるタリ 一ユングブレードを得ることができる。したがって、突起部分によってブレード部材の 像担持体に対する位置および姿勢を規定することができるので、ブレード部材を像 担持体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良く取付けることができ る。 According to the present invention, in the direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion and in the direction toward the end portion of the blade member on the side to be in contact with the image carrier, The position of the blade support member is defined by the parallel position defining means. Therefore, the mounting accuracy of the blade member can be further improved. According to the present invention, the blade supporting member is provided with the blade member and the spacer on the side facing the blade mounting portion of the cartridge, and the spacer is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member. A tiling blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be obtained. Therefore, since the position and posture of the blade member relative to the image carrier can be defined by the spacer, the blade member can be accurately attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. it can. According to the present invention, the blade supporting member is provided with the blade member on the side facing the cartridge mounting portion and has the protruding portion, and the protruding portion is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade supporting member to support the blade. It is possible to obtain a tally wing blade capable of defining at least one of the posture of the member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion. Therefore, since the position and posture of the blade member with respect to the image carrier can be defined by the protruding portion, the blade member can be accurately attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. .
本発明によれば、ブレード支持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が貼付け られた従来のクリーニングブレードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対する誤差 の影響を少なくすることができる。したがって、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを 除去して清掃するのに適した位置に精度良ぐまた容易に取付けることができる。 本発明によれば、スぺーサによってブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード支持 部材とブレード取付部との間隔を容易に規定することができる。したがって、ブレード 部材を像担持体力 トナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置により容易に精度良 く取付けることができる。  According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the influence of an error on the attachment position of the blade member as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. Therefore, the blade member can be accurately and easily attached to a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it. According to the present invention, the attitude of the blade support member and the distance between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion can be easily defined by the spacer. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the image carrier strength toner and cleaning it.
本発明によれば、クリーニングブレードをより容易にブレード取付部に取付けること ができる。したがって、ブレード部材を像担持体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに 適した位置により容易に精度良く取付けることができる。  According to the present invention, the cleaning blade can be more easily attached to the blade attachment portion. Therefore, the blade member can be easily and accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.
本発明によれば、クリーニングブレードは、ブレード取付部の基準面に平行な方向 であって、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側の端部から像担持体 に当接される側の端部に向力う方向におけるブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置 になるように、平行位置規定手段によってブレード支持部材の位置がさらに規定され る。これによつて、ブレード部材の取付精度をより一層向上させることができる。 According to the present invention, the cleaning blade is parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion. The blade member is parallel so that the position of the blade member in the direction facing the end of the blade member attached to the blade support member to the end of the blade abutting on the image carrier is a predetermined position. The position of the blade support member is further defined by the position defining means. Thereby, the attachment accuracy of the blade member can be further improved.
本発明によれば、たとえば操作者は、出力手段の出力結果に基づいてクリーニング ブレードを間隔調整手段によって移動させることによって、ブレード部材の第 1方向 における位置と第 1基準位置との間隔、およびブレード部材の第 2方向における位置 と第 2基準位置との間隔を調整することができる。したがって、ブレード部材が像担持 体からトナーを除去して清掃するのに適した位置に配置されるように、クリーニングブ レードを位置決めすることができるので、ブレード部材を精度良く取付けることができ る。  According to the present invention, for example, the operator moves the cleaning blade by the interval adjusting unit based on the output result of the output unit, thereby the interval between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the blade The distance between the position of the member in the second direction and the second reference position can be adjusted. Accordingly, since the cleaning blade can be positioned so that the blade member is disposed at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it, the blade member can be attached with high accuracy.
本発明によれば、ブレード支持部材に形成された段差部にブレード部材が貼付け られた従来のクリーニングブレードに比べて、ブレード部材の取付位置に対する誤差 の影響を少なくすることができるので、ブレード部材が像担持体からトナーを除去して 清掃するのに適した位置に精度良く取付けられたカートリッジを得ることができる。  According to the present invention, the influence of the error on the mounting position of the blade member can be reduced as compared with the conventional cleaning blade in which the blade member is attached to the step portion formed on the blade support member. It is possible to obtain a cartridge that is accurately attached at a position suitable for removing the toner from the image carrier and cleaning it.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像してトナー像を形 成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置に着脱可能に 設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材を像担持体に 当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードであって、 ブレード部材と、  [1] The latent image formed on the image carrier is developed with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and the toner image is transferred to a recording medium to be detachable from an image forming apparatus that forms an image. A cleaning blade mounted on a blade mounting portion of a cartridge provided and cleaning the image carrier by bringing the blade member into contact with the image carrier, the blade member;
ブレード取付部に臨む側の表面部にブレード部材を支持するブレード支持部材と ブレード支持部材のブレード取付部に臨む側に突出して設けられ、ブレード取付 部とブレード支持部材との間に介在されることによって、ブレード支持部材の姿勢お よびブレード支持部材とブレード取付部との間隔のうちの少なくともいずれか一方を 規定する規定部材とを備えることを特徴とするクリーニングブレード。  A blade support member that supports the blade member on the surface portion facing the blade mounting portion, and protrudes to the side of the blade support member facing the blade mounting portion, and is interposed between the blade mounting portion and the blade support member. And a defining member that defines at least one of a posture of the blade support member and an interval between the blade support member and the blade mounting portion.
[2] 規定部材は、スぺーサであることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載のクリーニングブレー ド、。  [2] The cleaning blade according to claim 1, wherein the defining member is a spacer.
[3] スぺーサは、ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面部力 ブレード部材に近づく につれてブレード支持部材から離反またはブレード支持部材に近接するように形成 されることを特徴とする請求項 2に記載のクリーニングブレード。  [3] The spacer according to claim 2, wherein the spacer is formed so as to be separated from the blade support member or closer to the blade support member as the surface portion force on the side attached to the blade attachment portion approaches the blade member. The cleaning blade described.
[4] 規定部材は、ブレード支持部材を形成する板状部材にブレード取付部に臨むべく 予め定める側に突出するように穿孔することによってブレード支持部材と一体的に形 成される突起部分であることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載のクリーニングブレード。  [4] The defining member is a protruding portion formed integrally with the blade supporting member by punching a plate-like member forming the blade supporting member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion. The cleaning blade according to claim 1, wherein:
[5] 突起部分は、筒状に形成され、  [5] The protruding portion is formed in a cylindrical shape,
突起部分の開口端部は、ブレード部材に近づくにつれてブレード支持部材力 離 反またはブレード支持部材に近接するように形成されることを特徴とする請求項 4に 記載のクリーニングブレード。  5. The cleaning blade according to claim 4, wherein the opening end portion of the projecting portion is formed so as to separate the blade support member force or approach the blade support member as the blade member is approached.
[6] ブレード支持部材の姿勢を調整する姿勢調整手段をさらに備えることを特徴とする 請求項 1〜5のいずれか 1つに記載のクリーニングブレード。  [6] The cleaning blade according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising posture adjusting means for adjusting the posture of the blade support member.
[7] ブレード取付部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に平行な方向で あって、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に取付けられる側の端部から像担持体に 当接される側の端部に向力う方向におけるブレード支持部材の位置を規定する平行 位置規定手段をさらに備えることを特徴とする請求項 1〜6のいずれか 1つに記載の クリーニングブレード。 [7] The blade mounting portion is in a direction parallel to the reference surface on which the cleaning blade is to be mounted, and from the end of the blade member on the side attached to the blade support member to the image carrier. The cleaning blade according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising parallel position defining means for defining a position of the blade support member in a direction facing the end portion on the abutting side.
[8] 像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像してトナー像を形 成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置に着脱可能に 設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材を像担持体に 当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードの製造方法であつ て、  [8] The latent image formed on the image carrier is developed with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and the toner image is transferred to a recording medium to be detachable from an image forming apparatus that forms an image. A method of manufacturing a cleaning blade, which is attached to a blade attachment portion of a cartridge provided and cleans an image carrier by bringing a blade member into contact with the image carrier,
ブレード支持部材のブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定められる側の表面部に、ブレ 一ド部材を貼付けるステップと、  A step of attaching a blade member to a surface portion of the blade support member on a predetermined side to face the blade mounting portion;
ブレード支持部材のブレード部材が貼付けられた側の表面部に、突出するようにス ぺーサを設けるステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの製造方法。  And a step of providing a spacer on the surface portion of the blade support member on the side to which the blade member is affixed so as to protrude.
[9] 像担持体に形成される潜像を、トナーを含む現像剤によって現像してトナー像を形 成し、トナー像を記録媒体に転写して画像を形成する画像形成装置に着脱可能に 設けられるカートリッジのブレード取付部に取付けられ、ブレード部材を像担持体に 当接させることによって像担持体を清掃するクリーニングブレードの製造方法であつ て、 [9] The latent image formed on the image carrier is developed with a developer containing toner to form a toner image, and the toner image is transferred to a recording medium to be detachable from an image forming apparatus that forms an image. A method of manufacturing a cleaning blade, which is attached to a blade attachment portion of a cartridge provided and cleans an image carrier by bringing a blade member into contact with the image carrier,
板状部材にブレード取付部に臨むべく予め定める側に突出するように穿孔すること によって、突起部分が形成されたブレード支持部材を製造するステップと、 ブレード支持部材の突起部分が形成された側の表面部に、ブレード部材を貼付け るステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの製造方法。  Perforating a plate-like member so as to protrude to a predetermined side so as to face the blade mounting portion, and manufacturing a blade support member formed with a protruding portion; and a step of forming the protruding portion of the blade support member on the side where the protruding portion is formed And a step of affixing a blade member to the surface portion.
[10] 請求項 1〜7のいずれ力 1つに記載のクリーニングブレードをカートリッジのブレード 取付部に取付けるクリーニングブレードの取付方法であって、 [10] A cleaning blade mounting method for mounting the cleaning blade according to any one of claims 1 to 7 on a blade mounting portion of a cartridge,
ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼り付けられる側の表面と像担持体のブレード 部材が当接される表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブレード取付 部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード 部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、ブレード支持部材の姿勢およびブレード 取付部との間隔を規定する規定ステップと、 ブレード取付部とブレード支持部材との間に規定部材を介在させてクリーニングブ レードを取付ける取付ステップとを含むことを特徴とするクリーニングブレードの取付 方法。 The angle formed between the surface of the blade member that is attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier on which the blade member abuts is a predetermined angle, and the reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted A defining step that regulates the attitude of the blade support member and the distance from the blade mounting portion so that the position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the blade is a predetermined position; A cleaning blade mounting method comprising: a mounting step of mounting a cleaning blade with a defining member interposed between a blade mounting portion and a blade support member.
[11] 前記クリーニングブレードは、請求項 2または 3に記載のクリーニングブレードであり 前記規定ステップは、  [11] The cleaning blade according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the defining step includes:
ブレード取付部に取付けられる側の表面とブレード支持部材側の表面との成す角 度および厚みが異なる複数のスぺーサを準備するステップと、  Preparing a plurality of spacers having different angles and thicknesses between a surface to be attached to the blade mounting portion and a surface on the blade support member; and
前記複数のスぺーサから、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼付けられる側の 表面と像担持体の表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブレード取付 部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけるブレード 部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、スぺーサを選択するステップとを含むこ とを特徴とする請求項 10に記載のクリーニングブレードの取付方法。  The reference surface on which the cleaning blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted while the angle formed by the surface of the blade member on the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle from the plurality of spacers. 11. The cleaning blade mounting method according to claim 10, further comprising a step of selecting a spacer so that a position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined position is a predetermined position.
[12] 前記クリーニングブレードは、請求項 4または 5に記載のクリーニングブレードであり 前記規定ステップは、 [12] The cleaning blade according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the defining step includes:
ブレード支持部材の突起部分の高さおよび突起部分の端面とブレード部材を支持 する表面部分を含む仮想平面との成す角度が異なる複数のクリーニングブレードを 準備するステップと、  Preparing a plurality of cleaning blades having different heights between the projecting portions of the blade support member and the angle between the end surface of the projecting portion and a virtual plane including a surface portion supporting the blade member;
前記複数のクリーニングブレードから、ブレード部材のブレード支持部材に貼り付け られる側の表面と像担持体の表面との成す角度が予め定める角度になるとともに、ブ レード取付部のクリーニングブレードが取付けられるべき基準面に垂直な方向におけ るブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、クリーニングブレードを選択す るステップとを含むことを特徴とする請求項 10に記載のクリーニングブレードの取付 方法。  The angle between the surface of the plurality of cleaning blades to be attached to the blade support member and the surface of the image carrier is a predetermined angle, and a reference on which the blade of the blade mounting portion is to be mounted. 11. The method of mounting a cleaning blade according to claim 10, further comprising a step of selecting the cleaning blade so that the position of the blade member in a direction perpendicular to the surface is a predetermined position.
[13] 前記クリーニングブレードは、請求項 7に記載のクリーニングブレードであり、  [13] The cleaning blade is the cleaning blade according to claim 7,
規定ステップと取付ステップとの間に、  Between the specified step and the mounting step,
ブレード取付部の前記基準面に平行な方向であってブレード部材のブレード支持 部材に取付けられる側の端部力 像担持体に当接される側の端部に向力う方向にお けるブレード部材の位置が予め定める位置になるように、前記方向におけるブレード 支持部材の位置を平行位置規定手段によって規定するステップをさらに含むことを 特徴とする請求項 10に記載のクリーニングブレードの取付方法。 Blade support of the blade member in a direction parallel to the reference surface of the blade mounting portion End force on the side attached to the member Position of the blade support member in the direction so that the position of the blade member in the direction facing the end on the side in contact with the image carrier is a predetermined position The method for mounting a cleaning blade according to claim 10, further comprising a step of defining the position by means of parallel position defining means.
[14] 請求項 1〜7のいずれか 1つに記載のクリーニングブレードのカートリッジのブレード 取付部への取付位置を決定するクリーニングブレードの位置決め装置であって、 ブレード取付部およびクリーニングブレードを保持する保持手段と、 [14] A cleaning blade positioning device for determining a mounting position of the cleaning blade cartridge according to any one of claims 1 to 7 to a blade mounting portion of the cartridge, and holding the blade mounting portion and the cleaning blade Means,
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードのブレード部材の第 1方向における位 置、およびクリーニングブレードの第 1方向における位置決めの基準となる第 1基準 位置を検出する第 1位置検出手段と、  A first position detecting means for detecting a position of the blade member of the cleaning blade held by the holding means in the first direction and a first reference position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade in the first direction;
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードのブレード部材の第 1方向に略垂直な 第 2方向における位置、およびクリーニングブレードの第 2方向における位置決めの 基準となる第 2基準位置を検出する第 2位置検出手段と、  Second position detecting means for detecting a position of the cleaning blade held by the holding means in a second direction substantially perpendicular to the first direction and a second reference position serving as a reference for positioning the cleaning blade in the second direction. When,
第 1位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 1方向における位置および 第 1基準位置、ならびに第 2位置検出手段によって検出されるブレード部材の第 2方 向における位置および第 2基準位置を出力する出力手段と、  The position in the first direction and the first reference position of the blade member detected by the first position detection means, and the position in the second direction of the blade member and the second reference position detected by the second position detection means are output. Output means;
保持手段に保持されるクリーニングブレードを移動させることによって、ブレード部 材の第 1方向における位置と第 1基準位置との間隔、およびブレード部材の第 2方向 における位置と第 2基準位置との間隔を調整する間隔調整手段とを備えることを特徴 とするクリーニングブレードの位置決め装置。  By moving the cleaning blade held by the holding means, the distance between the position of the blade member in the first direction and the first reference position, and the distance between the position of the blade member in the second direction and the second reference position are set. A cleaning blade positioning device comprising: an interval adjusting means for adjusting.
[15] 画像形成装置に着脱可能に設けられるカートリッジであって、 [15] A cartridge detachably provided in the image forming apparatus,
像担持体と、  An image carrier;
像担持体が収容されるハウジングと、  A housing that houses the image carrier;
ハウジングのブレード取付部に取付けられる請求項 1〜7のいずれか 1つに記載の クリーニングブレードとを備えることを特徴とするカートリッジ。  A cartridge comprising the cleaning blade according to claim 1, wherein the cartridge is attached to a blade attachment portion of the housing.
PCT/JP2007/053112 2006-02-21 2007-02-20 Cleaning blade and its manufacturing method, mounting method and positioning device for cleaning blade, and cartridge WO2007097346A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006044581A JP4504321B2 (en) 2006-02-21 2006-02-21 Cleaning blade manufacturing method and cleaning blade mounting method
JP2006-044581 2006-02-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007097346A1 true WO2007097346A1 (en) 2007-08-30

Family

ID=38437385

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2007/053112 WO2007097346A1 (en) 2006-02-21 2007-02-20 Cleaning blade and its manufacturing method, mounting method and positioning device for cleaning blade, and cartridge

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4504321B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2007097346A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015222386A (en) * 2014-05-23 2015-12-10 キヤノン株式会社 Cartridge and image forming apparatus

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2020177180A (en) 2019-04-22 2020-10-29 キヤノン株式会社 Cleaning device and manufacturing method for cleaning device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08166751A (en) * 1994-12-13 1996-06-25 Canon Inc Cleaning device, process cartridge, and image forming device
JP2000075753A (en) * 1998-08-31 2000-03-14 Canon Inc Mounting adjustment method of cleaning member, process cartridge and image forming device
JP2000330348A (en) * 1999-05-21 2000-11-30 Canon Inc Method and device for adjusting and fixing plate-member position
JP2005316265A (en) * 2004-04-30 2005-11-10 Canon Inc Image forming apparatus

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH06124056A (en) * 1992-10-12 1994-05-06 Sharp Corp Cleaning device
JPH09166948A (en) * 1995-10-13 1997-06-24 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Method for setting position of movable member and jig therefor

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08166751A (en) * 1994-12-13 1996-06-25 Canon Inc Cleaning device, process cartridge, and image forming device
JP2000075753A (en) * 1998-08-31 2000-03-14 Canon Inc Mounting adjustment method of cleaning member, process cartridge and image forming device
JP2000330348A (en) * 1999-05-21 2000-11-30 Canon Inc Method and device for adjusting and fixing plate-member position
JP2005316265A (en) * 2004-04-30 2005-11-10 Canon Inc Image forming apparatus

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015222386A (en) * 2014-05-23 2015-12-10 キヤノン株式会社 Cartridge and image forming apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP4504321B2 (en) 2010-07-14
JP2007225737A (en) 2007-09-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6963706B2 (en) Process cartridge and electrophotographic image forming apparatus
US6898399B2 (en) Electrophotographic photosensitive drum process cartridge and electrophotographic image forming apparatus
US6937832B2 (en) Process cartridge, mountable to an image forming apparatus, having first contact portion to be guided by a guide when mounted and second contact portion to limit cartridge rotation or movement when mounted, and image forming apparatus mounting such a process cartridge
JP2000242077A (en) Photoreceptor unit, developing device, process cartridge, and image forming device
KR101462712B1 (en) Developer layer thickness regulating device, image bearing member cleaning device, developing device, cleaning device, process cartridge and image forming apparatus
US20060188286A1 (en) Blade-cleaning device and blade member supporting method
US20050047814A1 (en) Developing unit and image forming device having the developing unit
US20100300484A1 (en) Cleaning device and cleaning performance maintaining method
US8068779B2 (en) Coated-core cleaner blades
WO2007097346A1 (en) Cleaning blade and its manufacturing method, mounting method and positioning device for cleaning blade, and cartridge
JPS62192771A (en) Picture forming device
US7362992B2 (en) Developing unit and image forming apparatus
JP4113900B2 (en) Developing device, process cartridge, image forming apparatus
JP4967749B2 (en) Sheet metal processing apparatus, sheet metal processing method, developing apparatus, and image forming apparatus
JP2009116221A (en) Assembly method for process cartridge, side plates retaining tool and process cartridge
JP4527472B2 (en) Developing device and image forming apparatus
JP3994109B2 (en) Developing device, process cartridge, image forming apparatus
JP2005352512A5 (en)
JP3281673B2 (en) Paper dust removal unit for image forming equipment
JP2015028517A (en) Developing unit, image forming unit, and image forming apparatus
JP5791971B2 (en) Developing device and image forming apparatus using the same
JPH0452760Y2 (en)
JP4598107B2 (en) Charging device, developing device, and image forming apparatus
US7715766B2 (en) Developing unit and image forming apparatus using the same
JP5153836B2 (en) Mounting structure and image forming apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 07714612

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1